1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8346 The following 2 lines are empty:
8349 \begin_layout Verbatim
8353 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8368 environment is identical to
8372 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8373 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8380 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8384 \begin_layout Section
8385 Nesting Environments
8386 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8390 Nesting ! Environments
8396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8405 \begin_layout Subsection
8409 \begin_layout Standard
8411 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8413 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8415 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8417 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8447 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8452 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8453 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8457 \begin_inset space ~
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8469 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8478 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8480 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8483 arg "depth-increment"
8489 arg "depth-decrement"
8503 arg "depth-increment"
8509 arg "depth-decrement"
8513 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8514 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8518 \begin_layout Standard
8519 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8520 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8521 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8522 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8523 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8527 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8529 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8531 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8534 \begin_layout Subsection
8535 What You Can and Can't Nest
8538 \begin_layout Standard
8539 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8540 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8543 \begin_layout Standard
8544 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8545 than a simple yes or no.
8546 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8550 Completely unnestable
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8564 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8565 environments have them:
8568 \begin_layout Description
8569 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8570 Can't nest into them.
8574 \begin_layout Itemize
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8586 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 \begin_layout Description
8607 \begin_inset space ~
8610 Nestable You can nest them.
8611 You can nest other things into them.
8615 \begin_layout Itemize
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Description
8678 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8679 You can't nest anything into them.
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_inset space ~
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8778 \begin_layout Standard
8779 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8787 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8797 \begin_inset space ~
8800 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8801 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8802 nested section headings violate this.
8810 \begin_layout Subsection
8811 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8812 \begin_inset Index idx
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8824 \begin_layout Standard
8825 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8826 affected by nesting anyhow.
8830 \begin_layout Itemize
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Standard
8844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8852 Figures and tables in
8856 are not affected by this.
8861 Have a look at section
8862 \begin_inset space ~
8866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8868 reference "sec:Floats"
8872 for more information about
8879 \begin_layout Standard
8881 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8882 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8886 \begin_layout Standard
8887 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8895 of its own, it behaves just like a
8896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8903 paragraph environment.
8904 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8908 \begin_layout Standard
8909 Here's an example with a table:
8912 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 This is (a) and it's nested.
8922 \begin_layout Standard
8923 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8929 \begin_layout Standard
8931 \begin_inset Tabular
8932 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8933 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9020 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9027 \begin_layout Enumerate
9029 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9037 \begin_layout Standard
9038 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9041 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 \begin_layout Enumerate
9047 This is (a) and it's nested.
9051 \begin_layout Standard
9052 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9058 \begin_layout Standard
9060 \begin_inset Tabular
9061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9165 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9170 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9175 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9178 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9181 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 This is (a) and it's nested.
9190 \begin_layout Standard
9191 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9197 \begin_layout Standard
9199 \begin_inset Tabular
9200 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9201 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 \begin_layout Standard
9289 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9295 \begin_layout Enumerate
9297 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9308 \begin_layout Standard
9309 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9315 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9316 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9320 \begin_layout Subsection
9321 Usage and General Features
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9325 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9326 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9335 is the innermost possible depth.
9336 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9339 \begin_layout Enumerate
9340 level #1 – outermost
9344 \begin_layout Enumerate
9349 \begin_layout Enumerate
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
9359 \begin_layout Itemize
9364 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Standard
9374 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9375 both of them in the example.
9376 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9386 For example, if we tried to nest another
9391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9398 , we would get errors.
9401 \begin_layout Subsection
9403 \begin_inset Index idx
9406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9415 \begin_layout Standard
9416 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9417 We have several examples of nested environments.
9418 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9423 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9426 \begin_layout Labeling
9427 \labelwidthstring MMM
9428 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9437 \begin_layout Labeling
9438 \labelwidthstring MMM
9439 #2-a This is level #2.
9440 We created it by using
9443 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9449 arg "depth-increment"
9456 \begin_layout Labeling
9457 \labelwidthstring MMM
9458 #3-a This is level #3.
9459 This time, we just enter
9466 arg "depth-increment"
9470 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9474 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9480 arg "depth-increment"
9487 \begin_layout Standard
9492 environment, nested inside of
9493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9501 So, it's at level #4.
9502 We did this by entering
9505 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9511 arg "depth-increment"
9514 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9519 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9535 \begin_layout Standard
9540 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9543 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9549 \begin_layout Labeling
9550 \labelwidthstring MMM
9551 #4-a This is level #4.
9555 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9558 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9563 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9567 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9572 keep nesting things inside
9573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9584 \begin_layout Labeling
9585 \labelwidthstring MMM
9586 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9591 \begin_layout Labeling
9592 \labelwidthstring MMM
9593 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9594 and this is level #6.
9595 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9599 \begin_layout Labeling
9600 \labelwidthstring MMM
9601 #5-b Back to level #5.
9605 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9611 arg "depth-decrement"
9618 \begin_layout Labeling
9619 \labelwidthstring MMM
9623 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9629 arg "depth-decrement"
9632 , we're back at level #4.
9636 \begin_layout Labeling
9637 \labelwidthstring MMM
9638 #3-b Back to level #3.
9639 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9643 \begin_layout Labeling
9644 \labelwidthstring MMM
9645 #2-b Back to level #2.
9650 \begin_layout Labeling
9651 \labelwidthstring MMM
9652 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9653 After this sentence, we will enter
9657 and change the paragraph environment back to
9664 \begin_layout Standard
9665 We could have also used the
9681 environment in place of the
9686 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9690 Example 2: Inheritance
9693 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9694 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9706 arg "depth-increment"
9710 \begin_inset Newline newline
9713 which, we will change to the
9721 \begin_layout Enumerate
9726 environment, at level #2.
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 Notice how the nested
9734 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9738 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9742 \begin_layout Standard
9743 We ended this example by entering
9748 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9752 and reset the nesting depth by using
9755 arg "depth-decrement"
9761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9762 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9771 \begin_inset Argument 1
9774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9775 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9783 \begin_layout Enumerate
9784 This is level #1, in an
9788 paragraph environment.
9789 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9793 \begin_layout Enumerate
9798 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9804 arg "depth-increment"
9808 Now, what happens if we nest an
9812 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9813 label be? An asterisk?
9817 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9828 So, its label is a bullet.
9829 (We got here by using
9832 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9838 arg "depth-increment"
9841 , then changing the environment to
9849 \begin_layout Itemize
9850 Here's level #4, produced using
9853 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9859 arg "depth-increment"
9863 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9868 \begin_layout Enumerate
9871 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9876 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9880 , because we are in the
9888 environment (that is, it is an
9903 \begin_layout Enumerate
9908 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9909 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9913 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9917 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9920 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9923 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 arg "depth-decrement"
9930 to decrease the depth after the next
9933 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9940 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9947 \begin_layout Enumerate
9949 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9950 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9954 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9964 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9969 reset the counter for the label.
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9987 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9988 into the twofold-nested
9996 \begin_layout Enumerate
9997 The same thing happens if we do another
10000 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10006 arg "depth-decrement"
10009 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10012 \begin_layout Standard
10013 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10018 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10029 The number of other
10033 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10040 The same rule applies for the
10044 environment, as well.
10047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10048 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10051 \begin_layout Enumerate
10052 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10053 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10054 the same detail with how we did it.
10063 \begin_layout Standard
10071 arg "depth-increment"
10078 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10079 the example in parentheses someplace.
10080 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10081 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10082 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10086 \begin_layout Enumerate
10091 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10095 \begin_layout Verse
10096 Now we will add verse.
10097 \begin_inset Newline newline
10100 It will get much worse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10111 arg "depth-increment"
10121 \begin_layout Verse
10122 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10123 \begin_inset Newline newline
10126 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10133 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10141 \begin_layout Verse
10142 Here comes a table:
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10147 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10153 \begin_layout Standard
10155 \begin_inset Tabular
10156 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10157 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10244 \begin_layout Verse
10248 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10258 arg "depth-increment"
10264 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10270 \begin_inset Newline newline
10278 arg "depth-decrement"
10285 \begin_layout Enumerate
10290 : level #1) This is another item.
10291 Note that selecting a
10295 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10296 3 times to put the table inside the
10304 \begin_layout Quotation
10305 We're now ending the
10309 list and changing to
10314 We're still at level #1.
10315 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10316 The next set of paragraphs is a
10317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10324 We will nest both the
10331 \begin_inset space ~
10336 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10340 for the letter body.
10344 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10347 to preserve the depth.
10348 Remember that you need to use
10351 arg "newline-insert newline"
10354 to create multiple lines inside the
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10371 \begin_layout Right Address
10373 \begin_inset Newline newline
10376 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10383 \begin_layout Address
10385 \begin_inset space ~
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10396 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10397 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10398 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10399 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10400 as soon as possible.
10401 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10404 \begin_layout Quotation
10405 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10406 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10407 with your order, along with payment.
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 We thank you again for your patience.
10414 \begin_layout Address
10416 \begin_inset Newline newline
10423 \begin_layout Quotation
10424 That ends that example!
10427 \begin_layout Standard
10428 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10429 gives you a lot of power with just
10431 We could have easily nested an
10452 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10455 \begin_layout Subsection
10457 \begin_inset Index idx
10460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10461 Nesting ! Separation
10467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10469 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10476 \begin_layout Standard
10477 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10479 For example you need two different enumerations:
10482 \begin_layout Enumerate
10487 \begin_layout Enumerate
10492 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator plain
10503 \begin_layout Itemize
10509 \begin_layout Standard
10510 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10516 \begin_layout Enumerate
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Standard
10529 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10530 list item and use the menu
10532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 Separated <Name> Above
10537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10538 Separated <Name> Below
10541 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10542 ) and before or behind it the
10544 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10549 (red arrow in LyX).
10550 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10551 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10558 arg "paragraph-break"
10565 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10568 \begin_layout Section
10569 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10570 \begin_inset Index idx
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10582 \begin_layout Standard
10583 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10584 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10586 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10587 be broken at the end of a line.
10588 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10592 \begin_layout Subsection
10594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10596 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10601 \begin_inset Index idx
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10614 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10615 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10616 ) not to break the line at
10618 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10621 \begin_layout Quote
10622 Further documentation is given in section
10623 \begin_inset Newline newline
10627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10629 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10653 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10662 A protected space is set with
10664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 \begin_inset space ~
10675 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10681 \begin_layout Subsection
10683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10685 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10690 \begin_inset Index idx
10693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 Spacing ! Horizontal
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10706 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 The length units are listed in Appendix
10711 \begin_inset space ~
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10717 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10728 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10733 \begin_inset Index idx
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 Spaces ! Inter-word
10745 \begin_layout Standard
10746 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10747 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10748 at the ends of sentences.
10749 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10750 automatically takes care about this.
10751 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10752 followed by a period; see section
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10759 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10764 To insert a normal space, select
10766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10777 arg "space-insert normal"
10783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10787 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10792 \begin_inset Index idx
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10823 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10824 inside abbreviations:
10827 \begin_layout Quote
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 or between values and units.
10838 Compare for example this:
10839 \begin_inset Newline newline
10843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 \begin_inset Newline newline
10850 10 kg (normal space
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10867 arg "space-insert thin"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10878 You can also insert the following space types:
10881 \begin_layout Description
10883 \begin_inset space ~
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10890 space A line with a
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10895 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 negative thin space between the arrows.
10905 \begin_layout Description
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10914 space A line with a
10915 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10919 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10926 negative medium space between the arrows.
10929 \begin_layout Description
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10938 space A line with a
10939 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10943 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10950 negative thick space between the arrows.
10953 \begin_layout Description
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10967 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 em) space between the arrows.
10985 \begin_layout Description
10987 \begin_inset space ~
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10999 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 em) space between the arrows.
11017 \begin_layout Description
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11031 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 em) space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11059 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 cm space between the arrows.
11074 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset space ~
11080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11082 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11086 lists the different space sizes.
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 \begin_inset Float table
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11101 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11105 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 \begin_inset Tabular
11116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11394 \begin_inset Index idx
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11408 feature for adding extra space
11409 in a uniform fashion.
11410 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11411 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11412 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11413 equally between themselves.
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11422 This is on the left side
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 This is on the right
11429 \begin_layout Quote
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_layout Quote
11445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11460 That was an example in the
11466 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 is one in a standard paragraph.
11478 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11482 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11486 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11494 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11563 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11582 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11584 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11585 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11589 option in the space dialog.
11597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11601 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11606 \begin_inset Index idx
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11619 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11620 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11627 What is correct English?:
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11676 \begin_layout Standard
11678 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11695 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11698 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11719 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11728 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11729 That is why it is named
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11739 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11776 There you find the following sizes:
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11792 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11793 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11798 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 \begin_inset space ~
11809 \begin_inset Index idx
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11813 Document ! Settings
11818 for the paragraph separation.
11819 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11836 \begin_inset Index idx
11839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11846 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11851 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11852 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11861 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 s are described in section
11871 \begin_inset space ~
11875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11886 If there are several
11890 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11891 You can therefore use
11895 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11898 \begin_layout Standard
11903 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11910 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11928 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11929 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11941 \begin_layout Subsection
11942 Paragraph Alignment
11943 \begin_inset Index idx
11946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11947 Paragraph ! Alignment
11955 \begin_layout Standard
11956 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11961 dialog (toolbar button
11964 arg "layout-paragraph"
11968 There are five possibilities:
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12035 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12042 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12043 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12044 the left and right margins.
12045 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12050 This paragraph is right aligned,
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 this one is centered,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is left aligned.
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset Index idx
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 Page breaks ! Forced
12075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12077 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12086 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12087 force a page break where you want one.
12088 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 is good at page breaking.
12090 Only if you use a lot of
12094 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12100 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12104 have to change the page breaking.
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12110 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12121 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12131 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12133 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12134 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12139 at the top of a page.
12140 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12142 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12143 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12144 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12148 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12152 to learn more about
12159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12163 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12168 \begin_inset Index idx
12171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12172 Page breaks ! Clear
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12182 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12183 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12184 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12185 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12189 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12200 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12214 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12215 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12218 \begin_layout Subsection
12220 \begin_inset Index idx
12223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12242 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12259 arg "newline-insert newline"
12263 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12280 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12283 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12285 This is useful to avoid
12286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12298 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 very good at line breaking.
12301 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12302 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Quote"
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12316 reference "sec:Verse"
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12323 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12330 \begin_layout Subsection
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12334 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12353 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12364 \begin_layout Standard
12368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12369 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12376 you can insert horizontal lines.
12377 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12378 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12379 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12395 \begin_layout Section
12396 Characters and Symbols
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12401 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12402 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12410 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12414 for information on how this is done.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12423 dialog via the menu
12425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12441 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12442 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12444 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12452 \begin_layout Section
12453 Fonts and Text Styles
12454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12456 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12463 \begin_layout Subsection
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12477 \begin_layout Standard
12478 There are two types of fonts:
12481 \begin_layout Description
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset Index idx
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12496 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12501 characters) in the font.
12502 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12503 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12504 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12505 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12506 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12507 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12508 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12509 \begin_inset Newline newline
12512 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12513 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12514 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12515 sizes than at small ones.
12516 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_layout Description
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_inset Index idx
12547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12554 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12555 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12556 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12557 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12558 image manipulation program.
12559 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12560 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 pixels high up to 34
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12569 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12570 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12572 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12573 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12574 \begin_inset Newline newline
12577 Bitmap fonts are named
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12585 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12590 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12591 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12592 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12593 use scalable fonts.
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12597 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12602 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12603 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12604 font to emphasize text, you use an
12605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12613 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12615 In \SpecialChar LyX
12616 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12620 \begin_layout Subsection
12623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12625 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12633 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 used its own fonts.
12635 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12636 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12641 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12642 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12643 to a word processor.
12644 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12645 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 files are very portable across
12647 different machines.
12648 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 has increased a lot
12650 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12653 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12661 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12666 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 code in the document
12668 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 engines that are also able directly
12674 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12676 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12678 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12680 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12681 that is installed on your system.
12682 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12694 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12695 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12703 \begin_layout Subsection
12704 Document Font and Font size
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12707 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 You can set the document fonts in the
12737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Document ! Settings
12755 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12756 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12759 \begin_inset space ~
12768 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12773 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12781 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12782 This requires that you use
12794 as the output format, i.
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset space \space{}
12802 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12803 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12804 installed (see section
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12811 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12816 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12818 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12819 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12824 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12825 cannot determine the family.
12826 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12827 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12830 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12835 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12840 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12846 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12848 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12850 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12853 font encoding, this is
12854 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12855 , depending on the document language,
12858 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12859 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12867 \begin_inset space ~
12873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12883 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12884 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12892 \begin_inset space ~
12898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12906 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12927 European Computer Modern
12930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12938 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12941 \begin_layout Standard
12946 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12947 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12952 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12955 \begin_inset space ~
12960 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12966 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12967 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12970 \begin_layout Itemize
12974 \begin_inset space ~
12979 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12997 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12998 community in order to replace
13002 as the default font.
13003 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13004 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13021 One difference is improved kerning.
13029 \begin_layout Itemize
13030 If you do not like the look of
13038 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13043 \begin_inset space ~
13049 \begin_inset space ~
13059 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13060 \begin_inset space ~
13063 serif and typewriter fonts,
13067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13068 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13075 \begin_inset space ~
13084 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13089 \begin_inset space \space{}
13097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13101 \begin_inset space \space{}
13107 \begin_inset space ~
13115 \begin_inset space ~
13125 but you can also select your own.
13126 \begin_inset Newline newline
13129 The differences between roman,
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13141 fonts are explained in section
13142 \begin_inset space ~
13146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13148 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13153 \begin_inset Newline newline
13159 \begin_inset space ~
13164 was originally designed for newspapers.
13165 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13166 into the small newspaper columns.
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13175 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13178 \begin_layout Standard
13179 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13192 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13197 depends on the class you are using.
13198 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13201 \begin_layout Standard
13202 Note that the font size is the
13207 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13208 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13209 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13210 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13219 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13226 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13233 \begin_layout Standard
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13242 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13244 \begin_inset space ~
13247 serif or typewriter.
13252 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13262 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13265 \begin_layout Standard
13270 LaTeX font encoding
13272 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13273 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13279 \begin_inset Index idx
13282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13290 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13292 \begin_inset space ~
13296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13298 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13305 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13306 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13307 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13311 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13319 \begin_layout Standard
13320 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13322 Use Old Style Figures
13326 Use True Small Caps
13329 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13332 Use Old Style Figures
13334 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13336 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13344 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13348 Use True Small Caps
13350 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13351 of scaled capitals.
13352 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13353 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13356 \begin_layout Standard
13361 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13362 a font to display the script characters.
13366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13367 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13373 \begin_inset Index idx
13376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13383 So this has no effect for the document language
13399 \begin_layout Standard
13402 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13404 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13405 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13411 \begin_inset Index idx
13414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13416 packages ! microtype
13425 \begin_layout Standard
13428 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13430 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13435 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13436 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13442 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13443 \begin_inset space ~
13447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13449 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13459 \begin_layout Standard
13460 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13464 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13472 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13477 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13478 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13480 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13482 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13485 dialog, see section
13486 \begin_inset space ~
13490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13492 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13504 \begin_layout Subsection
13508 \begin_layout Standard
13509 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13510 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13512 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13513 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13514 choose a math font in the dialog
13516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13520 \begin_inset Index idx
13523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13524 Document ! Settings
13530 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13531 automatically selects a math font.
13532 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13533 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13542 \begin_inset space ~
13548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13553 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13554 document font is available.
13557 \begin_layout Standard
13558 Note that the math font will not be used for
13562 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13568 or by the insertion of the command
13575 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13576 \begin_inset space ~
13580 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13581 while the math characters do not.
13583 \begin_inset space ~
13586 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13589 \begin_inset space ~
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13602 in the document font settings.
13605 \begin_layout Standard
13606 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13607 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13608 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13609 font (in most cases
13610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13625 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13626 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset space ~
13640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13646 \begin_layout Subsection
13647 Using Different Character Styles
13648 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13652 name "subsec:charstyles"
13659 \begin_inset Index idx
13662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13669 \begin_inset Index idx
13672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13681 \begin_layout Standard
13682 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13683 automatically changes the
13684 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13687 style for certain paragraph environments.
13689 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601107
13690 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13692 This is where we meet the concept of
13698 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13700 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13706 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13710 supports two character styles,
13720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601215
13726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13729 e., available with all document classes.
13730 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13732 custom character styles
13734 for specific purposes.
13735 We describe both types of characters styles in a minute.
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13740 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601474
13741 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13751 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13755 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13768 — you customized the
13773 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13774 among them, encourage the use of
13786 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13787 \begin_inset space ~
13791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13793 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13798 Rather than fiddling with
13802 , they encourage the use of
13814 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13819 \begin_inset Quotes els
13823 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13826 ), not their form (
13827 \begin_inset Quotes els
13831 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13835 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13836 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13837 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13838 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13839 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13840 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13846 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13850 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13851 With a semantic markup (such as
13855 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13860 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13862 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13863 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13866 \begin_layout Standard
13868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525597858
13869 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic character styles that are
13870 provided by \SpecialChar LyX
13876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600514
13879 Builtin Character Styles
13880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13882 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13889 \begin_layout Standard
13891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596484
13892 The two builtin character styles can be
13893 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13897 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
13901 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
13902 both of these styles
13905 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
13913 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
13919 \begin_layout Standard
13924 style, do one of the following:
13927 \begin_layout Itemize
13928 click on the toolbar button
13937 \begin_layout Itemize
13938 use the key binding
13945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
13949 \begin_layout Itemize
13951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
13959 arg "dialog-show character"
13965 arg "dialog-show character"
13968 ) as described in section
13969 \begin_inset space ~
13973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13975 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13984 \begin_layout Standard
13985 These commands are all toggles.
13990 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13993 \begin_layout Standard
13994 One typically uses the
13998 style for proper names.
14000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14007 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14013 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14017 \begin_layout Standard
14019 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14024 is producing text in
14028 , but the definition can be changed.
14033 \begin_layout Standard
14034 A more widely used character style is the
14039 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14046 \begin_layout Itemize
14047 clicking on the toolbar button
14056 \begin_layout Itemize
14057 using the keybindings
14064 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14068 \begin_layout Itemize
14070 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14078 arg "dialog-show character"
14084 arg "dialog-show character"
14087 ) as described in section
14088 \begin_inset space ~
14092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14094 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14103 \begin_layout Standard
14108 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14110 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14115 packages use a different font
14116 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14117 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14123 \begin_layout Standard
14124 We've been using the
14128 style all over the place in this document.
14129 Here's one more example:
14132 \begin_layout Quotation
14135 Do not overuse character styles!
14138 \begin_layout Standard
14139 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14140 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14141 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14142 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
14144 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14148 \begin_layout Standard
14150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598505
14151 In contrast to the custom character styles, the builtin styles are represented
14152 only as font changes and integrated in the
14160 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14163 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14172 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14176 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14179 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14181 \begin_inset space ~
14184 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14186 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14192 arg "dialog-show character"
14198 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14200 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14206 arg "dialog-show character"
14210 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14216 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599406
14217 Custom Character Styles
14218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14220 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14227 \begin_layout Standard
14229 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598904
14230 Custom character styles can be provided by the document class, a module
14232 \begin_inset space ~
14236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14238 reference "subsec:Modules"
14245 ), or local layout settings (see section
14246 \begin_inset space ~
14250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14252 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14257 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14261 markup for specific functions.
14262 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14267 module that provides, among other things, some custom character styles
14268 to markup linguistic levels:
14277 \begin_inset Quotes els
14281 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14287 \begin_layout Standard
14289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598951
14290 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14292 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14298 \begin_layout Standard
14300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599380
14301 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14306 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14307 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14308 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14313 appears as normal font change, the custom character style
14314 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14327 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14328 This is the way all custom character styles look and feel like.
14329 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14330 \begin_inset Flex Code
14333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14335 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14344 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14358 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14363 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14372 Note that custom character styles might (as in the example) or might not
14373 emulate on screen their formal appearance.
14378 \begin_layout Subsection
14380 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14382 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14394 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14396 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14402 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14407 \begin_inset Index idx
14410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14419 \begin_layout Standard
14420 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14421 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14424 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14426 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14428 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14432 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14433 the properties of text passages
14434 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14438 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14439 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14440 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14441 from ordinary dialog.
14442 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14446 \begin_layout Standard
14448 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601791
14449 If there are no custom character styles provided by the document class or
14450 a module for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better
14451 way of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly
14452 tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
14457 comes in as a last resort.
14462 \begin_layout Standard
14463 Before we document how to
14464 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14465 use custom character style
14466 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14467 tweak the text properties
14469 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14470 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14472 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14476 \begin_inset Newline newline
14479 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14480 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14483 \begin_layout Standard
14485 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14486 use custom character styles
14487 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14488 tweak text properties
14491 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14496 \begin_inset space ~
14499 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14501 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14507 arg "dialog-show character"
14512 dialog or press the toolbar button
14515 arg "dialog-show character"
14520 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14523 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14524 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14526 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14529 property that you can choose.
14530 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14533 \begin_inset space ~
14538 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14540 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14544 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14546 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14551 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14552 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14553 environments all at once.
14556 \begin_layout Standard
14558 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14563 properties, and their options (in addition to
14566 \begin_inset space ~
14572 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14576 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14584 \begin_layout Labeling
14585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14599 The possible options are:
14603 \begin_layout Labeling
14604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14609 This is the Roman font family.
14610 Normally a serif font.
14611 It's also the default family.
14621 \begin_layout Labeling
14622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14626 \begin_inset space ~
14633 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14645 \begin_layout Labeling
14646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14653 This is the Typewriter font family.
14659 arg "font-typewriter"
14665 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14669 \begin_layout Standard
14671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14672 The general differences of these families are:
14675 \begin_layout Itemize
14677 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14682 fonts use characters with serifs.
14683 These are the small
14684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14691 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14692 The following example shows the difference:
14693 \begin_inset Newline newline
14697 \begin_inset Newline newline
14702 text without serifs
14705 \begin_inset Newline newline
14708 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14709 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14716 \begin_layout Itemize
14718 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14723 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14724 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14725 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14728 \begin_layout Itemize
14730 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14743 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14761 \begin_inset Newline newline
14765 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14770 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14781 \begin_inset Note Note
14784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14787 For more on phantoms see section
14788 \begin_inset space ~
14792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14794 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14804 \begin_inset Newline newline
14813 \begin_layout Labeling
14814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14819 This corresponds to the print weight.
14824 \begin_layout Labeling
14825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14830 This is the Medium font series.
14831 It's also the default series.
14834 \begin_layout Labeling
14835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14842 This is the Bold font series.
14855 \begin_layout Labeling
14856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14861 As the name implies.
14866 \begin_layout Labeling
14867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14872 This is the Upright font shape.
14873 It's also the default shape.
14876 \begin_layout Labeling
14877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14887 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
14892 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
14897 s the Italic font shape
14903 \begin_layout Labeling
14904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14911 This is the Slanted font shape
14913 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14914 , this is different from italic).
14917 \begin_layout Labeling
14918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14922 \begin_inset space ~
14929 This is the Small caps font shape
14936 \begin_layout Labeling
14937 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14942 Alters the text color.
14943 Note that not all DVI
14944 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
14946 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
14949 viewers are able to display colors.
14951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
14955 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
14957 \begin_inset space ~
14964 , which means that the document default color set in
14966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14967 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14973 \begin_inset space ~
14979 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
14981 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
14985 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15065 \begin_inset Index idx
15068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15077 \begin_layout Labeling
15078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15083 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15084 the language of the document.
15085 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15087 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15090 in blue to indicate the change
15091 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15092 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15096 \begin_inset Newline newline
15099 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15101 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15102 When using the spell checking (see section
15103 \begin_inset space ~
15107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15109 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15113 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15114 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15116 \begin_inset Newline newline
15119 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15121 Exclude from Spellchecking
15124 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15127 \begin_layout Labeling
15128 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15133 Alters the size of the font.
15135 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15137 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15144 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15145 document font size.
15146 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15147 the details, but a general description of what
15153 \begin_layout Labeling
15154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15175 arg "font-size tiny"
15181 \begin_layout Labeling
15182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15203 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15209 \begin_layout Labeling
15210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15231 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15237 \begin_layout Labeling
15238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15259 arg "font-size small"
15265 \begin_layout Labeling
15266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15280 It's also the default size.
15284 arg "font-size normal"
15290 \begin_layout Labeling
15291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15312 arg "font-size large"
15318 \begin_layout Labeling
15319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15340 arg "font-size larger"
15346 \begin_layout Labeling
15347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15368 arg "font-size largest"
15374 \begin_layout Labeling
15375 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15396 arg "font-size huge"
15402 \begin_layout Labeling
15403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15424 arg "font-size giant"
15430 \begin_layout Labeling
15431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15436 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15456 arg "font-size increase"
15462 \begin_layout Labeling
15463 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15468 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15488 arg "font-size decrease"
15495 \begin_layout Standard
15500 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15501 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15503 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15504 — use those instead.
15505 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15508 \begin_layout Labeling
15509 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15511 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15521 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15522 change a few other things at the character level
15523 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15524 have text passages being underlined
15528 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15529 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15530 days, when you could not change fonts.
15531 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15532 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15533 because some people
15537 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15544 \begin_layout Labeling
15545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15547 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15554 This is text with emphasize on
15557 This might seem like the same as
15561 , but it is actually a bit different.
15567 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15569 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15570 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15574 \begin_layout Labeling
15575 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15577 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15582 Don't use underlining.
15587 \begin_layout Labeling
15588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15594 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15602 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15604 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15613 arg "font-underline"
15619 \begin_inset Newline newline
15623 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15626 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15627 when you could not change fonts.
15628 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15629 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15630 because some people
15634 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15639 \begin_layout Labeling
15640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15646 \begin_inset space ~
15655 This is text with Double under
15656 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15658 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15667 arg "font-underunderline"
15671 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15673 \begin_inset Newline newline
15676 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15677 about double underbar
15682 \begin_layout Labeling
15683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15687 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15689 \begin_inset space ~
15698 This is text with Wavy under
15699 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15701 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15710 arg "font-underwave"
15714 \begin_inset Newline newline
15717 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15718 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15719 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15724 \begin_layout Labeling
15725 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15732 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15738 \begin_layout Labeling
15739 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15746 Don't use strikethrough.
15749 \begin_layout Labeling
15750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15754 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15756 \begin_inset space ~
15760 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15768 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15770 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15771 Single strikethrough
15779 arg "font-strikeout"
15783 \begin_inset Newline newline
15786 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15787 changed in the meantime.
15790 \begin_layout Labeling
15791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15793 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15797 \begin_inset space ~
15801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15807 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15815 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15817 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15823 \begin_inset Newline newline
15826 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15830 \begin_layout Standard
15832 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600643
15833 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15834 you access to the two builtin semantic character styles (see section
15835 \begin_inset space ~
15839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15841 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15848 \begin_layout Itemize
15850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15857 This is text with emphasize on
15862 \begin_layout Itemize
15866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15873 This is text with Noun on.
15875 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
15882 , this is a logical attribute.
15883 Normally it's equivalent to
15886 \begin_inset space ~
15896 \begin_layout Standard
15897 So you have a huge number of combinations to
15898 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
15900 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
15905 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
15906 chosen a new character style
15907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
15908 applied a text property
15911 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
15914 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15919 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15921 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
15927 arg "dialog-show character"
15935 arg "dialog-show character"
15938 ) dialog, the settings are
15939 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
15943 You can activate the
15944 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
15946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
15947 last applied properties
15949 by using the toolbar button
15952 arg "textstyle-apply"
15956 The button lets you apply
15957 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
15958 your custom character style
15959 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
15962 even when the dialog isn't visible.
15965 \begin_layout Standard
15966 To completely reset the
15967 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
15969 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
15970 text properties of a selection
15972 to the default, use
15980 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
15981 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
15982 you just set the shape to
15983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16001 \begin_inset space ~
16015 \begin_layout Standard
16017 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16018 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16026 \begin_inset space ~
16038 \begin_layout Itemize
16040 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16053 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16071 \begin_inset Newline newline
16075 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16089 \begin_inset Note Note
16092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 For more on phantoms see section
16094 \begin_inset space ~
16098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16100 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16110 \begin_inset Newline newline
16116 \begin_layout Itemize
16118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16123 fonts use characters with serifs.
16124 These are the small
16125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16132 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16133 The following example shows the difference:
16134 \begin_inset Newline newline
16138 \begin_inset Newline newline
16143 text without serifs
16146 \begin_inset Newline newline
16149 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16150 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16157 \begin_layout Itemize
16159 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16164 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16165 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16166 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16171 \begin_layout Standard
16173 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16181 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16182 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16185 \begin_inset space ~
16190 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16191 the property to be removed.
16192 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16193 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16194 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16212 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16213 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16221 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16225 \begin_inset space ~
16230 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16241 If you, for example, set
16242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16260 \begin_inset space ~
16265 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16274 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16279 \begin_layout Standard
16281 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16284 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16285 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16288 \begin_layout Section
16289 Printing and Previewing
16292 \begin_layout Subsection
16296 \begin_layout Standard
16297 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16298 using \SpecialChar LyX
16299 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16300 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16301 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16302 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16304 Additional Features
16309 \begin_layout Standard
16311 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16314 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16315 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16316 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16319 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16320 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16321 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16322 to turn your writing into printable output.
16323 This happens in two stages:
16326 \begin_layout Enumerate
16327 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16328 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16330 a file with the extension,
16331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16345 \begin_layout Enumerate
16346 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16347 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16348 to use the commands in the
16352 file to produce printable output.
16355 \begin_layout Subsection
16356 Output file formats
16357 \begin_inset Index idx
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16369 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16377 Simple text (ASCII)
16378 \begin_inset Index idx
16381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16382 File formats ! ASCII
16390 \begin_layout Standard
16391 This file type has the extension
16392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16404 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16408 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16415 \begin_layout Standard
16416 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16418 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16419 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16421 \begin_inset space ~
16427 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16428 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16429 bibliography (section
16430 \begin_inset space ~
16434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16436 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16441 If your document includes such material, use
16443 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16444 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16446 \begin_inset space ~
16450 \begin_inset space ~
16454 \begin_inset space ~
16462 \begin_inset space ~
16466 \begin_inset space ~
16472 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16473 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16479 \begin_inset Index idx
16482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16483 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16492 \begin_layout Standard
16493 This file type has the extension
16494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16505 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16508 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16509 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16510 -Errors or to process it manually
16511 with console commands.
16512 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16513 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16514 's temporary directory whenever you
16515 view or export your document.
16518 \begin_layout Standard
16519 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16520 -file using the menu
16522 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16523 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16527 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16528 export variants are explained in section
16529 \begin_inset space ~
16533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16535 reference "subsec:Export"
16542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16544 \begin_inset Index idx
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16556 \begin_layout Standard
16557 This file type has the extension
16558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16578 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16579 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16580 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16584 \begin_layout Standard
16585 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16586 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16587 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16588 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16589 when you view the DVI.
16590 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16593 \begin_layout Standard
16594 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16596 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16597 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16602 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16603 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 \begin_inset space ~
16611 The latter option uses the program
16613 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16619 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16622 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16623 font access (see section
16624 \begin_inset space ~
16628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16630 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16635 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16636 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16641 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16643 \begin_inset Index idx
16646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16647 File formats ! PostScript
16655 \begin_layout Standard
16656 This file type has the extension
16657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16669 PostScript was developed by the company
16673 as a printer language.
16674 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16676 PostScript can be seen as a
16677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16680 programming language
16681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16684 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16689 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16696 \begin_inset Index idx
16699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16701 packages ! pstricks
16711 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16714 \begin_layout Standard
16715 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16719 Encapsulated PostScript
16720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16723 (EPS, file extension
16724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16736 As \SpecialChar LyX
16737 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16738 convert them in the background to EPS.
16739 If, for example, you have 50
16740 \begin_inset space ~
16743 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16745 \begin_inset space ~
16748 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16749 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16751 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16752 EPS to avoid this problem.
16755 \begin_layout Standard
16756 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16758 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16759 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16767 \begin_inset Index idx
16770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16777 \begin_inset Index idx
16780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16789 \begin_layout Standard
16790 This file type has the extension
16791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16807 Portable Document Format
16808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16815 was derived from PostScript.
16816 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16825 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16826 looks exactly the same.
16829 \begin_layout Standard
16830 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16834 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16838 (JPG, file extension
16839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16866 Portable Network Graphics
16867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16870 (PNG, file extension
16871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16883 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16884 converts them in the
16885 background to one of these formats.
16886 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16887 will slow down your workflow.
16888 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16891 \begin_layout Standard
16892 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
16894 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16900 \begin_layout Description
16902 \begin_inset space ~
16905 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16909 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16912 \begin_layout Description
16914 \begin_inset space ~
16921 ) This uses the program
16923 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16926 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16929 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16932 is a new engine, derived from
16936 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16937 access (see section
16938 \begin_inset space ~
16942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16944 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16949 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16950 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16955 \begin_layout Description
16957 \begin_inset space ~
16964 ) This uses the program
16969 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16975 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16976 font access (see section
16977 \begin_inset space ~
16981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16983 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16988 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16989 vertically written Japanese.
16992 \begin_layout Description
16994 \begin_inset space ~
16997 (cropped) This is the same as
17000 \begin_inset space ~
17005 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17006 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17007 to generate good-looking
17008 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17011 \begin_layout Description
17013 \begin_inset space ~
17016 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17020 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17024 \begin_layout Description
17026 \begin_inset space ~
17029 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17033 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17034 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17038 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17039 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17042 \begin_layout Standard
17046 \begin_inset space ~
17055 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17056 works without problems.
17057 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17058 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17062 \begin_inset space ~
17070 \begin_inset space ~
17075 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17083 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17085 \begin_inset Index idx
17088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17089 FileFormats ! XHTML
17095 \begin_inset Index idx
17098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17107 \begin_layout Standard
17108 This file type has the extension
17109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17121 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17122 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17123 When \SpecialChar LyX
17124 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17125 suitable for the purpose.
17126 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17129 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17132 between different formats, which are described in section
17134 Math Output in XHTML
17139 \begin_inset space ~
17147 \begin_layout Standard
17148 XHTML output remains
17149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17156 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17157 features are supported yet.
17161 and the World Wide Web
17165 Additional Features
17167 manual, for more information.
17170 \begin_layout Standard
17171 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17173 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17174 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17180 \begin_layout Subsection
17182 \begin_inset Index idx
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17194 \begin_layout Standard
17195 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17196 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17205 or use the toolbar button
17212 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17213 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17214 \begin_inset space ~
17218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17220 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17224 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17226 \begin_inset space ~
17230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17232 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17237 Further output formats can be selected via
17239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17240 View (Other Formats)
17242 or the toolbar button
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17253 viewer window using the menu
17255 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17261 Update (Other Formats)
17266 \begin_layout Standard
17267 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17270 To have a real output, export your document.
17273 \begin_layout Section
17274 A few Words about Typography
17275 \begin_inset Index idx
17278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17287 \begin_layout Subsection
17288 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17289 \begin_inset Index idx
17292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17299 \begin_inset Index idx
17302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17311 \begin_layout Standard
17312 In \SpecialChar LyX
17314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17325 symbol comes in four variants: the
17342 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17348 \begin_layout Standard
17349 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17359 height_special "totalheight"
17364 backgroundcolor "none"
17367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17368 \begin_inset Tabular
17369 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17370 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17371 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17372 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17373 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17374 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17403 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17404 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17443 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17466 system key combination
17470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17471 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17483 and the em dash with
17486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17499 is the Mac label for the right
17510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17523 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17546 system key combination or
17547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17561 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17574 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17613 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17619 \begin_layout Standard
17620 Dashes can also be inserted with
17622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17627 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17635 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17636 and 2014 for the en dash).
17639 \begin_layout Standard
17640 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17641 mode and has a length of its own.
17642 Here are some examples:
17645 \begin_layout Enumerate
17646 line- and page-breaks
17647 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17657 \begin_layout Enumerate
17659 \begin_inset space ~
17663 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17673 \begin_layout Enumerate
17674 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17675 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17685 \begin_layout Enumerate
17686 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17690 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17700 \begin_layout Standard
17702 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17704 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17705 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17713 \begin_layout Subsection
17714 Dashes and Line Breaks
17715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17717 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17724 \begin_layout Standard
17725 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17726 case and locale, e.
17727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17733 \begin_layout Itemize
17734 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17735 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17738 \begin_layout Itemize
17739 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17743 \begin_layout Itemize
17744 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17745 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17748 \begin_layout Standard
17749 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17750 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17761 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17764 \begin_layout Enumerate
17765 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17766 \begin_inset space ~
17769 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17771 The Elements of Typographic Style
17774 \begin_inset space ~
17777 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17780 \begin_layout Enumerate
17781 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17788 Prevent Hyphenation
17793 \begin_inset space ~
17809 in \SpecialChar TeX
17815 \begin_layout Itemize
17817 \begin_inset space ~
17821 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17831 height_special "totalheight"
17836 backgroundcolor "none"
17839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17848 \begin_layout Itemize
17852 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17862 height_special "totalheight"
17867 backgroundcolor "none"
17870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17874 \begin_inset space ~
17882 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17883 \begin_inset space ~
17886 – sont très utiles.
17889 \begin_layout Itemize
17896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17905 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17909 \begin_layout Standard
17910 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17911 \begin_inset space ~
17914 – in contrast to an overfull line
17915 \begin_inset space ~
17918 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17922 \begin_layout Standard
17923 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17926 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17927 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17928 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17929 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17934 \begin_layout Enumerate
17935 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17936 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17937 or \SpecialChar TeX
17943 \begin_layout Itemize
17947 \begin_inset space ~
17950 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17951 \begin_inset space ~
17954 – sont très utiles.
17958 \begin_layout Enumerate
17959 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
17960 \begin_inset Newline newline
17965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17966 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17967 Optional line break
17973 \begin_layout Itemize
17974 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17975 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17976 should be followed by
17977 a line break opportunity.
17980 \begin_layout Standard
17981 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
17982 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17988 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17999 \begin_layout Enumerate
18000 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18001 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18002 or en dashes (see section
18003 \begin_inset space ~
18007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18009 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18020 Changes and backwards compatibility
18023 \begin_layout Standard
18024 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18026 \begin_inset space ~
18029 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18030 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18039 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18040 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18048 \begin_layout Standard
18049 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18051 \begin_inset space ~
18054 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18056 prevents ligation to dashes.
18058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18065 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18070 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18071 after the input (unless the current text font is
18079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18080 The behavior was changed since
18081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18096 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18097 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18098 as non-breakable dashes.
18099 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18108 \begin_layout Standard
18111 \begin_inset space ~
18119 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18121 \begin_inset space ~
18124 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18129 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18130 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18132 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18136 If you used both literal and
18137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18144 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18146 \begin_inset space ~
18149 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18150 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18153 \begin_layout Subsection
18155 \begin_inset Index idx
18158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18167 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18174 \begin_layout Standard
18175 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18176 but automatically in the output.
18177 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18183 \begin_inset Index idx
18186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18193 following the rules of the document language.
18195 does not hyphenate text in the
18199 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18202 \begin_layout Standard
18204 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18208 font and with unusual constructs, like
18209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18217 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18218 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18219 This is done with the menu
18221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18222 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18224 \begin_inset space ~
18230 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18232 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18236 \begin_layout Standard
18237 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18238 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18249 would then see the hyphen
18250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18257 as a line break possibility.
18258 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18259 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18266 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18268 Prevent Hyphenation
18273 \begin_inset space ~
18281 \begin_layout Subsection
18283 \begin_inset Index idx
18286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18296 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18299 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18306 \begin_layout Standard
18307 When \SpecialChar LyX
18308 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18309 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18311 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18317 appropriate amount of space.
18318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18321 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18323 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18324 gets after another word.
18327 \begin_layout Standard
18328 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18329 not work in all cases.
18331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18342 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18343 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18346 \begin_layout Standard
18347 Here are some examples of
18351 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18354 \begin_layout Itemize
18359 \begin_layout Itemize
18364 \begin_layout Standard
18365 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18368 \begin_layout Itemize
18370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18374 this is too much space!
18377 \begin_layout Itemize
18382 \begin_layout Standard
18383 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18386 \begin_layout Standard
18387 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18390 \begin_layout Enumerate
18394 \begin_inset space ~
18399 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18400 \begin_inset space ~
18404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18406 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18411 \begin_inset Index idx
18414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18415 Spaces ! inter-word
18423 \begin_layout Enumerate
18427 \begin_inset space ~
18432 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18433 \begin_inset space ~
18437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18439 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18444 \begin_inset Index idx
18447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 \begin_layout Enumerate
18460 \begin_inset space ~
18464 \begin_inset space ~
18468 \begin_inset space ~
18475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18477 \begin_inset space ~
18482 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18483 This function is also bound to
18486 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18492 \begin_layout Standard
18493 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18496 \begin_layout Itemize
18498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18502 \begin_inset space \space{}
18505 this is too much space!
18508 \begin_layout Itemize
18509 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18513 \begin_layout Standard
18514 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18515 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18517 will take care of this.
18520 \begin_layout Standard
18521 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18525 \begin_inset space ~
18531 feature described in the section
18533 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18538 Additional Features
18543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18545 \begin_inset Index idx
18548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18549 Typography ! Quotation marks
18555 \begin_inset Index idx
18558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18559 Quotation marks | see
18563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18589 \begin_layout Standard
18591 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18592 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18593 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18603 The keyboard character,
18607 , generates this automatically.
18610 \begin_layout Standard
18611 You can specify what character the
18615 key produces by using the submenu
18621 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18625 \begin_inset Index idx
18628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18629 Document ! Settings
18634 dialog and switching the
18638 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18639 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18641 \begin_inset space ~
18647 \begin_layout Labeling
18648 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18660 \begin_inset space ~
18664 \begin_inset space ~
18668 \begin_inset Quotes els
18672 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18686 \begin_inset Quotes els
18690 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18693 quotation marks (as common, e.
18694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18700 \begin_layout Labeling
18701 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18704 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18708 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18712 \begin_inset space ~
18716 \begin_inset space ~
18720 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18724 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18730 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18734 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18738 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18742 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18745 quotation marks (as common, e.
18746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18752 \begin_layout Labeling
18753 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18756 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18760 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18764 \begin_inset space ~
18768 \begin_inset space ~
18772 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18776 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18782 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18786 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18790 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18794 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18797 quotation marks (as common, e.
18798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18804 \begin_layout Labeling
18805 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18808 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18812 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18816 \begin_inset space ~
18820 \begin_inset space ~
18824 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18828 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18834 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18838 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18842 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18846 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18849 quotation marks (as common, e.
18850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18856 \begin_layout Labeling
18857 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18860 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18864 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18868 \begin_inset space ~
18872 \begin_inset space ~
18876 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18880 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18886 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18890 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18894 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18898 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18901 quotation marks (as common, e.
18902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18905 g., in Switzerland)
18908 \begin_layout Labeling
18909 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18912 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18916 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18920 \begin_inset space ~
18924 \begin_inset space ~
18928 \begin_inset Quotes als
18932 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18938 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18942 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18946 \begin_inset Quotes als
18950 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18953 quotation marks (as common, e.
18954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18960 \begin_layout Labeling
18961 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18964 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18968 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18972 \begin_inset space ~
18976 \begin_inset space ~
18980 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18984 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18990 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18994 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18998 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19002 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19005 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19008 \begin_layout Labeling
19009 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19012 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19016 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19020 \begin_inset space ~
19024 \begin_inset space ~
19028 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19032 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19038 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19042 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19046 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19050 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19053 quotation marks (as common, e.
19054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19057 g., in Great Britain)
19060 \begin_layout Labeling
19061 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19064 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19068 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19072 \begin_inset space ~
19076 \begin_inset space ~
19080 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19084 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19090 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19094 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19098 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19102 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19105 quotation marks (as common, e.
19106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19112 \begin_layout Labeling
19113 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19116 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19120 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19124 \begin_inset space ~
19128 \begin_inset space ~
19132 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19136 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19142 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19146 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19150 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19154 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19157 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19163 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19164 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19165 the inner marks differ).
19173 \begin_layout Labeling
19174 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19177 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19181 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19189 \begin_inset space ~
19193 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19197 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19203 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19207 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19211 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19215 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19218 quotation marks (as common, e.
19219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19225 \begin_layout Labeling
19226 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19229 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19233 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19245 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19249 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19255 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19259 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19263 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19267 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19270 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19273 \begin_layout Labeling
19274 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19275 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19283 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19289 \begin_inset space ~
19293 \begin_inset space ~
19299 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19307 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19311 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19315 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19319 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19323 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19326 quotation marks (as common, e.
19327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19335 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19336 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19344 \begin_layout Labeling
19345 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19346 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19354 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19360 \begin_inset space ~
19364 \begin_inset space ~
19370 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19378 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19382 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19386 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19390 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19394 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19397 quotation marks (as common, e.
19398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19401 g., in North Korea and China)
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19406 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19407 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19415 \begin_layout Standard
19416 Inner quotation marks
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19422 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19423 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19431 does not necessarily mean
19432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19440 This is why we call them
19441 \begin_inset Quotes els
19445 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19461 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19463 \begin_inset Quotes els
19467 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19470 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19473 arg "quote-insert inner"
19478 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19484 \begin_layout Standard
19485 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19486 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19487 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19488 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19489 If you check the setting
19491 Use dynamic quotation marks
19495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19496 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19499 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19500 they appear in a special color).
19501 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19502 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19507 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19510 \begin_layout Standard
19511 Individual quotation marks (i.
19512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19515 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19516 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19520 \begin_layout Subsection
19522 \begin_inset Index idx
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 Typography ! Ligatures
19532 \begin_inset Index idx
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19566 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19573 \begin_layout Standard
19574 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19575 print them as single characters.
19576 These groups are known as
19581 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19582 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19584 Here are the standard ligatures:
19587 \begin_layout Itemize
19591 \begin_layout Itemize
19595 \begin_layout Itemize
19599 \begin_layout Itemize
19603 \begin_layout Itemize
19607 \begin_layout Standard
19608 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19611 \begin_layout Standard
19612 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19613 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19621 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19637 To break a ligature, use
19639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19640 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19642 \begin_inset space ~
19649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19660 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19677 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19685 \begin_layout Subsection
19687 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19689 \begin_inset Index idx
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 \begin_layout Standard
19705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19706 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19710 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19713 \begin_layout Description
19715 The name of the game.
19718 \begin_layout Description
19720 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19724 \begin_layout Description
19726 The \SpecialChar TeX
19727 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19731 \begin_layout Description
19732 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19733 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19737 \begin_layout Standard
19738 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19744 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19752 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19753 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19754 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19755 converges to the number
19756 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19759 : The actual version is
19760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19768 , the previous one was
19769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19780 \begin_layout Subsection
19782 \begin_inset Index idx
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19794 \begin_layout Standard
19795 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19796 space between two words.
19797 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19807 for units use the menu
19809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19810 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19812 \begin_inset space ~
19820 arg "space-insert thin"
19826 \begin_layout Standard
19827 Here is an example to show the differences:
19830 \begin_layout Standard
19831 \begin_inset Tabular
19832 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19833 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19834 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19835 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 \begin_inset space ~
19846 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 space between number and unit
19865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19874 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 half space between number and unit
19899 \begin_layout Subsection
19901 \begin_inset Index idx
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19913 \begin_layout Standard
19914 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19916 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19917 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19918 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19919 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19920 These bits of text became known as
19931 \begin_layout Standard
19932 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19933 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19934 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19935 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19936 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19937 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19938 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19939 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19940 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19941 \begin_inset Newline newline
19949 \begin_inset Newline newline
19957 \begin_inset Newline newline
19960 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19961 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19962 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19964 \begin_inset space ~
19968 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19970 key "latexcompanion"
19976 \begin_inset space ~
19980 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19987 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19988 's page break mechanism.
19991 \begin_layout Chapter
19992 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
19993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19995 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20002 \begin_layout Standard
20003 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20006 \begin_inset space ~
20012 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20015 \begin_layout Section
20017 \begin_inset Index idx
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20036 \begin_layout Standard
20038 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20041 \begin_layout Description
20044 \begin_inset space ~
20047 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20048 \begin_inset Newline newline
20052 \begin_inset Note Note
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20064 \begin_layout Description
20065 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20066 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20067 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20070 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20071 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20073 \begin_inset space ~
20079 \begin_inset Newline newline
20083 \begin_inset Note Comment
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20087 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20096 \begin_layout Description
20098 \begin_inset space ~
20101 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20102 set in the document settings under
20104 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20106 \begin_inset space ~
20112 \begin_inset Newline newline
20116 \begin_inset Newline newline
20120 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20130 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20135 of a comment that appears in the output.
20141 \begin_inset Newline newline
20145 \begin_inset Newline newline
20148 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20151 \begin_layout Standard
20152 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20164 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20167 \begin_layout Section
20169 \begin_inset Index idx
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20181 name "sec:Footnotes"
20188 \begin_layout Standard
20190 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20196 or the toolbar button
20199 arg "footnote-insert"
20211 \begin_inset Graphics
20212 filename clipart/footnote.png
20221 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20222 's representation of your footnote.
20232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20251 label, the box will
20255 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20256 Clicking on the box label again will close
20269 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20270 and click on the footnote
20285 \begin_layout Standard
20286 Here is an example footnote:
20294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20303 \begin_layout Standard
20304 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20305 position where the footnote box is placed.
20306 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20307 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20308 according to the document class.
20310 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20311 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20317 ey are described in the
20320 \begin_inset space ~
20328 \begin_layout Section
20330 \begin_inset Index idx
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20342 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20349 \begin_layout Standard
20350 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20352 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20356 \begin_inset space ~
20361 or the toolbar button
20364 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20390 appearing within your text.
20391 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20392 's representation of your margin
20401 \begin_layout Standard
20402 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20406 \begin_inset Marginal
20409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 This is a marginal note.
20419 \begin_layout Standard
20420 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20421 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20422 pages, right on odd pages.
20425 \begin_layout Standard
20426 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20429 \begin_inset space ~
20437 \begin_inset space ~
20445 \begin_layout Section
20446 Graphics and Images
20447 \begin_inset Index idx
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 \begin_inset Index idx
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20469 name "sec:Graphics"
20476 \begin_layout Standard
20477 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20478 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20481 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20490 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20493 \begin_layout Standard
20494 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20499 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20500 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20502 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20503 \begin_inset space ~
20507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20509 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20516 \begin_layout Standard
20521 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20522 of the image in the output.
20523 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20527 \begin_inset space ~
20531 \begin_inset space ~
20540 \begin_inset space ~
20544 \begin_inset space ~
20548 \begin_inset space ~
20553 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20554 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20562 \begin_layout Standard
20566 \begin_inset space ~
20570 \begin_inset space ~
20575 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20576 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20578 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20583 \begin_inset space ~
20588 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20589 with the image size is printed.
20592 \begin_layout Standard
20593 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20594 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20596 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20599 \begin_layout Standard
20601 \begin_inset Graphics
20602 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20610 \begin_layout Standard
20611 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20612 the image into a float, see section
20613 \begin_inset space ~
20617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20619 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20626 \begin_layout Subsection
20628 \begin_inset Index idx
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20640 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20647 \begin_layout Standard
20648 You can insert images in any known file format.
20649 But as we explained in section
20650 \begin_inset space ~
20654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20656 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20660 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20662 therefore uses the program
20666 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20667 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20668 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20669 \begin_inset space ~
20673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20675 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20682 \begin_layout Standard
20683 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20686 \begin_layout Description
20688 \begin_inset space ~
20691 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20692 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20693 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20697 Graphics Interchange Format
20698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20701 (GIF, file extension
20702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20714 \begin_inset Index idx
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20749 Portable Network Graphics
20750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20753 (PNG, file extension
20754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20766 \begin_inset Index idx
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20801 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20805 (JPG, file extension
20806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20830 \begin_inset Index idx
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 \begin_layout Description
20866 \begin_inset space ~
20869 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20871 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20872 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20873 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20874 \begin_inset Newline newline
20877 Scalable image formats can be
20878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20881 Scalable Vector Graphics
20882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20885 (SVG, file extension
20886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20898 \begin_inset Index idx
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20933 Encapsulated PostScript
20934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20937 (EPS, file extension
20938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20950 \begin_inset Index idx
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20985 Portable Document Format
20986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20989 (PDF, file extension
20990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21002 \begin_inset Index idx
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21020 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21021 result will not be scalable.
21022 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21036 \begin_layout Standard
21037 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21044 \begin_layout Subsection
21045 Grouping of Image Settings
21046 \begin_inset Index idx
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 Images ! Settings grouping
21058 \begin_layout Standard
21059 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21061 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21062 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21064 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21065 need to manually change each of them.
21069 \begin_layout Standard
21070 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21073 \begin_inset space ~
21077 \begin_inset space ~
21089 \begin_inset space ~
21093 \begin_inset space ~
21099 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21100 and checking the name of the desired group.
21103 \begin_layout Section
21105 \begin_inset Index idx
21108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21124 \begin_layout Standard
21125 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21128 arg "tabular-insert"
21133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21137 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21138 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21139 from the rest of the table.
21140 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21141 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21143 Here is an example table:
21146 \begin_layout Standard
21148 \begin_inset Tabular
21149 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21150 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21152 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 \begin_layout Subsection
21358 \begin_layout Standard
21359 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21362 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21366 This brings up the table dialog.
21367 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21368 cursor is placed currently.
21369 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21370 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21371 done on all of your selection.
21374 \begin_layout Standard
21375 In addition to the table dialog, the
21378 \begin_inset space ~
21383 helps you in setting table properties.
21384 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21387 \begin_layout Standard
21391 \begin_inset space ~
21396 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21397 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21398 current cell respectively.
21399 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21401 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21402 of text, see section
21403 \begin_inset space ~
21407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21409 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21416 \begin_layout Standard
21417 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21418 using the check box
21427 This will merge the cells to
21431 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21432 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21433 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21434 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21435 in the last row without the upper border:
21438 \begin_layout Standard
21440 \begin_inset Tabular
21441 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21442 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21444 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21445 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21446 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21466 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 \begin_layout Standard
21578 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21579 -arguments for the table.
21580 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21581 explained in the chapter
21588 \begin_inset space ~
21594 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21595 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21596 but are visible in the output.
21599 \begin_layout Standard
21600 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 Most DVI-viewers are
21612 able to display rotations.
21620 \begin_layout Standard
21625 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21630 adds lines for all cell borders.
21633 \begin_layout Subsection
21635 \begin_inset Index idx
21638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21639 Tables ! Multi-page
21645 \begin_inset Index idx
21648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 \begin_layout Standard
21658 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21661 \begin_inset space ~
21665 \begin_inset space ~
21673 \begin_inset space ~
21678 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21679 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21682 \begin_layout Description
21687 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21688 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21689 Except for the first page, if
21692 \begin_inset space ~
21700 \begin_layout Description
21704 \begin_inset space ~
21709 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21710 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21713 \begin_layout Description
21718 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21719 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21720 except for the last page, if
21723 \begin_inset space ~
21731 \begin_layout Description
21735 \begin_inset space ~
21740 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21741 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21744 \begin_layout Description
21745 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21746 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21748 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21752 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21755 \begin_inset space ~
21763 \begin_layout Standard
21764 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21765 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21766 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21772 In this context, first means first in this order:
21775 \begin_inset space ~
21787 \begin_inset space ~
21792 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21795 \begin_layout Standard
21797 \begin_inset Tabular
21798 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21799 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21800 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21801 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21802 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21803 <row endfirsthead="true">
21804 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21815 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21824 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 <row endfirsthead="true">
21835 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21855 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 <row endhead="true">
21868 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <row endhead="true">
21899 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <row endfoot="true">
21932 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21943 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21952 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23294 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <row endlastfoot="true">
23914 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23951 \begin_layout Subsection
23953 \begin_inset Index idx
23956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23965 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23972 \begin_layout Standard
23973 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23974 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23975 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23976 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23980 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23983 \begin_layout Standard
23984 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23985 for the column in the table dialog.
23986 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23987 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23991 \begin_layout Standard
23993 \begin_inset Tabular
23994 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23995 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23996 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23997 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23998 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24143 This is longer now.
24148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24199 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24200 This is longer now.
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 \begin_layout Standard
24232 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24233 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24238 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24239 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24245 Selection with the mouse or with
24249 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24250 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24251 the selection from outside the table.
24254 \begin_layout Section
24256 \begin_inset Index idx
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24275 \begin_layout Subsection
24279 \begin_layout Standard
24280 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24281 have a fixed location.
24283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24290 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24298 \begin_inset space ~
24303 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24304 too many notes on the current page.
24307 \begin_layout Standard
24308 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24309 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24310 and pages without text.
24311 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24312 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24313 Floats are therefore numbered.
24314 Referencing is described in section
24315 \begin_inset space ~
24319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24321 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24328 \begin_layout Standard
24329 To insert a float, use the menu
24331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24335 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24336 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24338 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24339 \begin_inset Index idx
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24348 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24349 paragraph within the float.
24350 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24351 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24352 left-clicking on the box label.
24353 A closed float box looks like this:
24354 \begin_inset Graphics
24355 filename clipart/float.png
24360 – a gray button with a red label.
24363 \begin_layout Standard
24364 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24366 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24369 \begin_layout Subsection
24371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24373 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24378 \begin_inset Index idx
24381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 Floats ! Figure floats
24390 \begin_layout Standard
24392 \begin_inset space ~
24396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24398 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24402 was created using the menu
24404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24405 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24411 arg "float-insert figure"
24415 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24418 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24424 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24428 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24429 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24431 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24433 \begin_inset space ~
24441 arg "layout-paragraph"
24447 \begin_layout Standard
24448 \begin_inset Float figure
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 \begin_inset Graphics
24456 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24471 name "fig:A-star-in"
24488 \begin_layout Standard
24489 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24490 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24492 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24501 ) and refer to it using the menu
24503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24509 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24513 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24514 vague references like
24515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24522 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24523 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24533 For more about cross-references, see section
24534 \begin_inset space ~
24538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24540 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24547 \begin_layout Standard
24548 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24549 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24550 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24551 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24552 as described in section
24553 \begin_inset space ~
24557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24559 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24565 \begin_inset space ~
24569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24571 reference "fig:Two-images"
24575 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24576 You can also set the images one below the other.
24578 \begin_inset space ~
24582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24584 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24591 reference "fig:Star"
24595 are the subfigures.
24598 \begin_layout Standard
24599 \begin_inset Float figure
24604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24609 \begin_inset Float figure
24614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24615 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24620 name "fig:Undefinable"
24632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24633 \begin_inset Graphics
24634 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24646 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24650 \begin_inset Float figure
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24674 \begin_inset Graphics
24675 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24687 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24694 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24699 name "fig:Two-images"
24716 \begin_layout Subsection
24718 \begin_inset Index idx
24721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24722 Floats ! Table floats
24730 \begin_layout Standard
24731 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24734 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24737 or the toolbar button
24740 arg "float-insert table"
24744 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24745 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24746 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24748 \begin_inset space ~
24752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24754 reference "tab:Table-float"
24761 \begin_layout Standard
24762 \begin_inset Float table
24767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24768 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24773 name "tab:Table-float"
24785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24787 \begin_inset Tabular
24788 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24789 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24790 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24791 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24792 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24919 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24940 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24943 \end{array}\right]$
24951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24964 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24985 \begin_layout Subsection
24987 \begin_inset Index idx
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24999 \begin_layout Standard
25001 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25002 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25003 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25005 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25013 \begin_inset space ~
25021 \begin_layout Section
25023 \begin_inset Index idx
25026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25035 \begin_layout Standard
25037 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25039 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25040 \begin_inset space \space{}
25047 \begin_layout Standard
25048 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25049 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25055 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25056 and its alignment within the page.
25059 \begin_layout Standard
25061 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25071 height_special "totalheight"
25076 backgroundcolor "none"
25079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25082 This is a minipage.
25083 The text is set in an italic style.
25086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25090 another formatting.
25098 \begin_layout Standard
25099 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25102 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25106 as described in section
25107 \begin_inset space ~
25111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25113 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25118 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25124 \begin_layout Standard
25125 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25135 height_special "totalheight"
25140 backgroundcolor "none"
25143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25145 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25151 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25155 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25165 height_special "totalheight"
25170 backgroundcolor "none"
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25175 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25183 \begin_layout Standard
25184 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25190 \begin_layout Standard
25191 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25193 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25200 \begin_inset space ~
25208 \begin_layout Chapter
25209 Mathematical Formulas
25210 \begin_inset Index idx
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 \begin_inset Index idx
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25254 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25261 \begin_layout Standard
25262 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25267 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25270 \begin_layout Section
25272 \begin_inset Index idx
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25284 \begin_layout Standard
25285 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25298 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25300 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25301 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25302 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25304 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25310 \begin_layout Standard
25311 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25315 \begin_inset space ~
25320 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25323 \begin_layout Standard
25324 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25325 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25328 \begin_layout Standard
25329 This is a line with an inline formula
25330 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25336 \begin_layout Standard
25337 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25338 paragraph, like this one:
25339 \begin_inset Formula
25346 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25349 \begin_layout Standard
25351 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25353 For example, typing
25354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25367 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25368 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25372 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25375 \begin_inset space ~
25383 \begin_layout Subsection
25384 Navigating in Formulas
25385 \begin_inset Index idx
25388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25397 \begin_layout Standard
25398 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25399 achieved with the arrow keys.
25401 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25402 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25407 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25408 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25412 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25416 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25419 \end{array}\right]$
25427 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25432 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25433 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25436 \begin_layout Standard
25441 , printed in this document as
25442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25446 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25453 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25454 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25455 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25460 For example, if you want
25461 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25469 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25479 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25483 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25488 , since in the latter case only the
25491 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25496 will be under the square root sign:
25497 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25503 \begin_layout Standard
25504 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25506 \begin_inset Formula
25508 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25517 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25518 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25521 \begin_layout Subsection
25525 \begin_layout Standard
25526 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25527 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25531 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25532 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25533 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25534 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25535 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25539 \begin_layout Subsection
25540 Exponents and Subscripts
25541 \begin_inset Index idx
25544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25551 \begin_inset Index idx
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25563 \begin_layout Standard
25564 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25567 arg "math-superscript"
25573 arg "math-subscript"
25576 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25578 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25581 , type in a formula
25584 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25594 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25600 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25604 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25610 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25616 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25625 , you have to use an extra
25629 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25630 For example, if you want
25631 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25637 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25643 Subscripts are similar: To get
25644 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25650 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25658 \begin_layout Subsection
25660 \begin_inset Index idx
25663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25672 \begin_layout Standard
25673 Create a fraction either with the command
25679 or by using the icon
25682 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25688 \begin_inset space ~
25694 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25695 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25696 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25701 To move back up, press
25706 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25707 \begin_inset Formula
25709 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25712 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25720 \begin_layout Subsection
25722 \begin_inset Index idx
25725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 \begin_layout Standard
25735 Roots can be created using the
25738 \begin_inset space ~
25746 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25752 arg "math-insert \\root"
25774 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25780 always produces a square root.
25783 \begin_layout Subsection
25784 Operators with Limits
25785 \begin_inset Index idx
25788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25795 \begin_inset Index idx
25798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25807 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25814 \begin_layout Standard
25816 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25820 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25823 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25824 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25825 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25826 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25827 The sum operator will automatically place its
25828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25835 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25837 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25841 \begin_inset Formula
25843 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25848 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25852 \begin_layout Standard
25853 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25855 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25856 behind the operator and using the menu
25858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25859 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25861 \begin_inset space ~
25865 \begin_inset space ~
25879 \begin_layout Standard
25880 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25889 \begin_inset Index idx
25892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25899 \begin_inset Formula
25901 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25906 which will place the
25907 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25919 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25920 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25926 \begin_layout Standard
25927 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25934 Have a look at section
25935 \begin_inset space ~
25939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25941 reference "subsec:Functions"
25945 for an explanation of function macros.
25948 \begin_layout Subsection
25950 \begin_inset Index idx
25953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25962 \begin_layout Standard
25963 Most math symbols can be found in the
25966 \begin_inset space ~
25971 under one of several categories; including
25988 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25992 \begin_layout Standard
25993 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25994 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25995 don't have to use the
25998 \begin_inset space ~
26003 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26005 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26008 \begin_layout Subsection
26010 \begin_inset Index idx
26013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26022 \begin_layout Standard
26023 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26029 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26035 \begin_inset space ~
26043 arg "math-insert \\space"
26047 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26048 For example, the sequence
26053 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26056 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26058 \begin_inset Graphics
26059 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26064 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26065 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26066 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26067 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26068 , because they are negative
26070 Here are two examples:
26073 \begin_layout Standard
26083 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26089 \begin_layout Standard
26099 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26105 \begin_layout Subsection
26107 \begin_inset Index idx
26110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26119 name "subsec:Functions"
26126 \begin_layout Standard
26130 \begin_inset space ~
26135 contains under the button
26138 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26141 a number of function macros, such as
26142 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26146 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26154 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26161 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26162 avoid confusions, because
26163 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26167 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26173 \begin_layout Standard
26174 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26176 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26180 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26186 \begin_layout Standard
26187 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26188 are placed, as described in section
26189 \begin_inset space ~
26193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26195 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26202 \begin_layout Subsection
26204 \begin_inset Index idx
26207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26216 \begin_layout Standard
26217 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26219 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26220 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26221 commands, for example, to enter
26222 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26225 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26226 Our example is entered by typing
26231 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26238 \begin_inset space ~
26242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26244 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26248 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26251 \begin_layout Standard
26252 \begin_inset Float table
26257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26258 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26263 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26267 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 \begin_inset Tabular
26278 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26279 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26280 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26281 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26282 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26420 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26474 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26528 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26582 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26636 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26690 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26798 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26843 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26868 \begin_inset space ~
26876 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26879 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26883 \begin_layout Section
26884 Brackets and Delimiters
26885 \begin_inset Index idx
26888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26895 \begin_inset Index idx
26898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26907 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26914 \begin_layout Standard
26915 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26917 For some purposes, using just the keys
26922 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26923 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26924 toolbar delimiter icon
26927 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26931 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26932 \begin_inset Formula
26934 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26942 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26943 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26947 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26950 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26956 \begin_inset Formula
26958 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26966 \begin_layout Standard
26967 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26968 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26972 \begin_layout Standard
26973 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26974 left side and right side.
26975 If you use the option
26978 \begin_inset space ~
26983 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26984 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26986 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26991 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26992 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26995 \begin_layout Standard
26996 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26997 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26998 is to go inside the brackets.
26999 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27004 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27005 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27006 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27010 arg "math-delim ( )"
27016 \begin_layout Section
27017 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27018 \begin_inset Index idx
27021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27028 \begin_inset Index idx
27031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27038 \begin_inset Index idx
27041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27042 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27050 \begin_layout Standard
27051 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27055 \begin_inset space ~
27063 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27067 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27068 Here is an example:
27069 \begin_inset Formula
27071 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27080 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27081 \begin_inset space ~
27085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27087 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27092 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27093 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27094 This alignment is set in the box
27099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27148 for every column as default.
27149 For example, the sequence
27150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27161 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27162 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27163 corresponds to the relevant column.
27164 The result will look like this:
27165 \begin_inset Formula
27168 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27169 column & has & has\,right\\
27170 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27179 \begin_layout Standard
27180 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27183 arg "newline-insert newline"
27186 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27187 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27189 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27192 or the math toolbar.
27195 \begin_layout Standard
27196 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27197 It can be created with the menu
27199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27200 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27202 \begin_inset space ~
27214 Here is an example:
27215 \begin_inset Formula
27229 \begin_layout Standard
27230 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27233 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27236 arg "newline-insert newline"
27240 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27245 arg "newline-insert newline"
27248 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27256 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27257 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27258 A new row is created by every further entry of
27261 arg "newline-insert newline"
27265 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27266 Here is an example:
27267 \begin_inset Formula
27269 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27270 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27275 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27276 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27277 \begin_inset Formula
27279 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27287 \begin_layout Standard
27288 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27295 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27296 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27299 reference "eq:asquared"
27304 The other types are described in section
27305 \begin_inset space ~
27309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27311 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27318 \begin_layout Section
27319 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27320 \begin_inset Index idx
27323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27324 Math ! Formula numbering
27330 \begin_inset Index idx
27333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27334 Math ! Referencing formulas
27340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27342 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27349 \begin_layout Standard
27350 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27352 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27353 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27355 \begin_inset space ~
27359 \begin_inset space ~
27367 arg "math-number-toggle"
27371 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27372 within parentheses.
27373 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27374 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27375 the document class.
27376 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27377 separated by a dot:
27378 \begin_inset Formula
27388 arg "math-number-toggle"
27391 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27392 You can only number displayed formulas.
27395 \begin_layout Standard
27396 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27398 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27399 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27401 \begin_inset space ~
27405 \begin_inset space ~
27413 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27416 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27417 \begin_inset Formula
27420 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27426 To number all lines use the shortcut
27429 arg "math-number-toggle"
27435 \begin_layout Standard
27436 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27439 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27440 A label is inserted with the menu
27442 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27451 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27452 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27453 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27465 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27466 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27467 We inserted in the following example the label
27468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27475 in the second line:
27476 \begin_inset Formula
27478 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27479 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27484 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27485 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27486 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27490 \begin_inset space ~
27498 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27502 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27503 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27504 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27505 as the formula number:
27508 \begin_layout Standard
27509 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27512 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27519 \begin_layout Standard
27520 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27521 's cross-reference box are described in section
27522 \begin_inset space ~
27526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27528 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27533 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27541 \begin_layout Section
27542 User defined math macros
27543 \begin_inset Index idx
27546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27555 \begin_layout Standard
27557 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27558 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27559 Math macros are explained in section
27562 \begin_inset space ~
27574 \begin_layout Section
27578 \begin_layout Subsection
27580 \begin_inset Index idx
27583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27592 \begin_layout Standard
27593 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27594 To set a font in a formula, use the
27597 \begin_inset space ~
27605 arg "math-insert \\font"
27608 , or enter its command, listed in table
27609 \begin_inset space ~
27613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27615 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27622 \begin_layout Standard
27623 \begin_inset Float table
27628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27629 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27634 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27638 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27648 \begin_inset Tabular
27649 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27650 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27651 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27652 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27684 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27711 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27738 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27798 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27825 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27859 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27886 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27920 \begin_layout Standard
27921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27929 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27945 \begin_layout Standard
27946 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27947 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27952 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27953 space when you need a space in the box.
27954 Here is an example where
27955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27966 denotes the set of numbers:
27967 \begin_inset Formula
27969 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27978 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27979 You can, for example, put a character in
27988 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27992 \begin_inset Newline newline
27995 So it is better not to use this feature.
27998 \begin_layout Standard
27999 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28000 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28004 \begin_inset Newline newline
28007 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28013 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28014 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28027 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28030 \begin_layout Standard
28031 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28033 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28034 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28036 \begin_inset space ~
28044 \begin_layout Subsection
28046 \begin_inset Index idx
28049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28058 \begin_layout Standard
28059 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28061 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28065 \begin_inset space ~
28069 \begin_inset space ~
28077 \begin_inset space ~
28085 arg "math-insert \\font"
28089 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28090 in black instead of blue.
28091 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28092 Here is an example:
28093 \begin_inset Formula
28096 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28097 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28106 \begin_layout Subsection
28108 \begin_inset Index idx
28111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28121 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28122 automatically chosen in most situations.
28140 For most characters,
28148 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28149 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28154 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28155 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28156 thinks are appropriate.
28157 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28160 arg "math-insert \\style"
28164 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28165 For example, you can set
28166 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28169 , which is normally in
28178 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28182 The four styles are used in the following example:
28185 \begin_layout Standard
28186 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28190 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28194 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28198 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28204 \begin_layout Standard
28205 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28206 is set in a particular size with the menu
28208 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28210 \begin_inset space ~
28215 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28216 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28217 will be adjusted to correspond.
28218 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28229 \begin_layout Standard
28233 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28239 \begin_layout Section
28240 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28242 \begin_inset Index idx
28245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28252 \begin_inset Index idx
28255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28264 \begin_layout Standard
28266 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28267 that are in common use.
28270 \begin_layout Subsection
28271 Enabling AMS-Support
28274 \begin_layout Standard
28275 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28276 the document by selecting the checkbox
28279 \begin_inset space ~
28283 \begin_inset space ~
28287 \begin_inset space ~
28294 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28298 \begin_inset Index idx
28301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28302 Document ! Settings
28310 \begin_inset space ~
28316 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28317 -errors in formulas,
28318 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28321 \begin_layout Subsection
28323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28325 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28330 \begin_inset Index idx
28333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28334 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28342 \begin_layout Standard
28343 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28344 provides a selection of different formula types.
28346 allows you to choose between
28367 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28368 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28375 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28378 \begin_layout Chapter
28382 \begin_layout Section
28384 \begin_inset Index idx
28387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28396 name "sec:Cross-References"
28403 \begin_layout Standard
28404 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28405 's strengths is cross-references.
28406 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28408 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28409 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28410 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28413 \begin_layout Enumerate
28417 \begin_layout Enumerate
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28420 name "enu:Second-item"
28427 \begin_layout Enumerate
28431 \begin_layout Standard
28432 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28434 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28437 or by pressing the toolbar button
28444 A gray label box like this:
28445 \begin_inset Graphics
28446 filename clipart/label.png
28450 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28452 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28487 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28488 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28504 \begin_layout Standard
28505 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28510 or the toolbar button
28513 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28517 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28518 \begin_inset Graphics
28519 filename clipart/reference.png
28523 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28525 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28538 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28542 \begin_layout Standard
28543 As an alternative to
28545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28548 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28553 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28554 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28568 \begin_layout Standard
28569 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28570 \begin_inset space ~
28574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28576 reference "enu:Second-item"
28583 \begin_layout Standard
28584 It is recommended to use a protected space
28588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28589 described in section
28590 \begin_inset space ~
28594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28596 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28605 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28606 line breaks between them.
28609 \begin_layout Standard
28610 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28613 \begin_layout Description
28614 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28617 reference "fig:Two-images"
28624 \begin_layout Description
28625 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28626 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28638 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28645 \begin_layout Description
28646 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28647 \begin_inset space ~
28651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28652 LatexCommand pageref
28653 reference "fig:Two-images"
28660 \begin_layout Description
28662 \begin_inset space ~
28666 \begin_inset space ~
28669 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28671 LatexCommand vpageref
28672 reference "fig:Two-images"
28677 \begin_inset Newline newline
28680 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28681 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28682 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28683 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28684 it prints “on the next page”.
28685 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28688 \begin_layout Description
28690 \begin_inset space ~
28694 \begin_inset space ~
28698 \begin_inset space ~
28701 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28704 reference "fig:Two-images"
28709 \begin_inset Newline newline
28712 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28718 ; otherwise it behaves like
28722 \begin_inset space ~
28726 \begin_inset space ~
28735 \begin_layout Description
28737 \begin_inset space ~
28740 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28741 \begin_inset Newline newline
28745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28753 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28763 \begin_inset Index idx
28766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28768 packages ! prettyref
28774 \begin_inset Index idx
28777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28779 packages ! refstyle
28790 \begin_inset Newline newline
28793 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28794 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28797 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28810 is the default and preferred because
28814 supports only English documents.
28815 The format is specified by using the command
28827 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28828 preamble of the document.
28829 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28847 \begin_inset Newline newline
28854 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28859 \begin_inset Newline newline
28870 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28871 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28873 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28874 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28879 , you might do so as follows:
28880 \begin_inset Newline newline
28887 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28892 \begin_inset Newline newline
28895 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28896 the package documentation
28897 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28899 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28905 \begin_inset Newline newline
28916 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28923 \begin_layout Description
28925 \begin_inset space ~
28928 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28930 LatexCommand nameref
28931 reference "fig:Two-images"
28938 \begin_layout Description
28940 \begin_inset space ~
28943 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28944 label for the reference:
28945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28946 LatexCommand labelonly
28947 reference "fig:Two-images"
28952 \begin_inset Newline newline
28955 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28956 Code, if you want to issue a command
28957 that \SpecialChar LyX
28963 , then you may want to use the
28966 \begin_inset space ~
28971 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28981 This is the form needed for e.
28982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28986 \begin_inset space \space{}
28993 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28994 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28996 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29000 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29004 \begin_layout Standard
29005 You can only use the style
29009 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29013 is always possible.
29016 \begin_layout Standard
29017 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29018 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29020 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29021 \begin_inset space ~
29025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29027 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29034 \begin_layout Standard
29035 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29039 \begin_inset space ~
29043 \begin_inset space ~
29048 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29049 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29052 \begin_inset space ~
29057 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29058 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29061 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29067 \begin_layout Standard
29068 You can change labels at any time.
29069 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29070 do not need to think about this.
29073 \begin_layout Standard
29074 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29076 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29080 \begin_layout Standard
29081 References are described in detail in the section
29082 \begin_inset space ~
29092 \begin_inset space ~
29100 \begin_layout Section
29101 Table of Contents and other Listings
29102 \begin_inset Index idx
29105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29112 \begin_inset Index idx
29115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29116 Navigating ! Outline
29122 \begin_inset Index idx
29125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29141 \begin_layout Subsection
29143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29145 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29152 \begin_layout Standard
29153 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29156 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29158 \begin_inset space ~
29162 \begin_inset space ~
29168 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29170 If you click on it, the
29174 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29175 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29176 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29178 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29180 \begin_inset space ~
29185 that is described in section
29186 \begin_inset space ~
29190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29192 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29199 \begin_layout Standard
29200 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29201 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29203 \begin_inset space ~
29207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29209 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29213 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29215 \begin_inset space ~
29219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29221 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29225 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29227 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29230 \begin_layout Subsection
29231 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29234 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29241 \begin_layout Standard
29242 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29244 You can insert them via the
29246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29250 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29253 \begin_layout Section
29254 URLs and Hyperlinks
29255 \begin_inset Index idx
29258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29265 \begin_inset Index idx
29268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29277 \begin_layout Subsection
29279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29288 \begin_layout Standard
29289 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29297 \begin_layout Standard
29298 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29300 \begin_inset Flex URL
29303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29305 https://www.lyx.org
29313 \begin_layout Standard
29314 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29320 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29324 \begin_layout Standard
29325 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29333 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29342 \begin_layout Subsection
29344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29346 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29353 \begin_layout Standard
29354 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29359 or with the toolbar button
29366 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29375 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29376 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29377 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29379 name "LyX's homepage"
29380 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29385 , an Email address like this:
29386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29388 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29389 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29395 , or a link to a file.
29400 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29408 \begin_layout Standard
29409 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29422 to the link target.
29425 \begin_layout Standard
29426 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29427 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29428 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29429 the text style dialog.
29430 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29434 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29436 name "LyX's homepage"
29437 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29445 \begin_layout Standard
29446 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29450 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29453 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29457 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29459 \begin_inset Newline newline
29467 \begin_inset Newline newline
29474 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29477 \begin_layout Section
29479 \begin_inset Index idx
29482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29491 name "sec:Appendices"
29498 \begin_layout Standard
29499 Appendices are created with the menu
29501 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29503 \begin_inset space ~
29507 \begin_inset space ~
29513 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29514 as the appendix part of the book.
29515 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29518 \begin_layout Standard
29519 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29520 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29521 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29522 and the subsection number.
29523 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29527 \begin_layout Standard
29529 \begin_inset space ~
29533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29535 reference "chap:Credits"
29540 \begin_inset space ~
29544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29546 reference "subsec:Export"
29553 \begin_layout Section
29555 \begin_inset Index idx
29558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29567 name "sec:Bibliography"
29574 \begin_layout Standard
29575 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29577 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29578 \begin_inset space ~
29582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29584 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29591 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29596 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29597 \begin_inset space ~
29601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29603 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29608 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29609 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29610 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29614 using a bibliography database.
29617 \begin_layout Standard
29618 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29619 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29623 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29624 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29625 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29626 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29627 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29630 \begin_layout Subsection
29631 The Bibliography Environment
29632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29634 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29641 \begin_layout Standard
29646 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29648 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29657 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29659 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29660 of ASCII characters only.
29664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29666 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29669 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29675 \begin_inset Newline newline
29679 \begin_inset Flex URL
29682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29684 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
29696 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29706 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29707 \begin_inset Newline newline
29714 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29715 the number of the entry.
29720 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29730 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29735 or the toolbar button
29738 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29742 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29743 containing the available citations.
29744 Select one or more keys from the list and
29754 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29755 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29761 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29762 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29774 \begin_layout Standard
29778 Companion Second Edition
29781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29783 key "latexcompanion"
29791 \begin_layout Standard
29792 The \SpecialChar LyX
29793 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29794 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29804 \begin_layout Standard
29805 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29812 \begin_inset Index idx
29815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29823 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29835 Author A and Author B(Year)
29836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29843 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29845 Then, if you select
29848 \begin_inset space ~
29853 in the document settings
29854 \begin_inset Index idx
29857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29858 Document ! Settings
29865 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29867 \begin_inset space ~
29873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29875 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29882 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29885 \begin_layout Standard
29886 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29889 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29891 \begin_inset space ~
29899 arg "layout-paragraph"
29903 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29906 \begin_layout Subsection
29907 Bibliography databases
29908 \begin_inset Index idx
29911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29912 Bibliography ! Databases
29918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29920 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29927 \begin_layout Standard
29928 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29934 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29936 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29937 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29942 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29944 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29945 your working field in a database.
29946 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29947 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29948 list for that document.
29949 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29953 \begin_layout Standard
29954 The database is a text file with the file extension
29955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29966 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29967 The format is explained in
29968 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29975 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29977 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29979 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29985 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29986 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29987 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29989 \begin_inset Flex URL
29992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29994 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30002 \begin_layout Standard
30004 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30005 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30006 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30008 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30010 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30011 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30012 Those are addressed by
30017 \begin_inset Index idx
30020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30022 packages ! biblatex
30028 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30029 (although it has been significantly
30030 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30040 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30041 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30042 might conversely fail to correctly
30043 handle databases that use specific
30052 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30057 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30062 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30064 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30068 \begin_inset Index idx
30071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30072 Document ! Settings
30084 \begin_inset space ~
30089 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30098 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30100 \begin_inset Index idx
30103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30104 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30113 \begin_layout Standard
30114 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30122 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30124 \begin_inset space ~
30130 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30131 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30139 Add bibliography to TOC
30141 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30146 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30147 in the document or just the cited references.
30150 \begin_layout Standard
30151 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30152 style file is a text file with the file extension
30153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30164 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30165 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30166 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30167 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30169 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30175 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30176 \begin_inset Newline newline
30180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30182 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30192 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30197 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30201 \begin_layout Standard
30202 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30205 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30207 \begin_inset Index idx
30210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30211 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30217 \begin_inset Index idx
30220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30222 packages ! biblatex
30230 \begin_layout Standard
30231 Accessing a database via
30235 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30243 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30245 \begin_inset space ~
30251 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30252 you cannot select a
30257 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30266 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30279 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30280 file (text file with the file extension
30281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30292 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30293 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30295 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30299 \begin_layout Standard
30304 styles are not set in the
30307 \begin_inset space ~
30312 dialog, but in the document settings.
30313 \begin_inset Index idx
30316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 Document ! Settings
30322 However, in the dialog in the
30326 field, which is only visible if you use
30330 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30331 example how its heading will appear).
30332 These options are deescribed in detail in the
30337 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30347 \begin_layout Standard
30348 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30349 \begin_inset space ~
30353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30355 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30366 Bibliography Processors
30369 \begin_layout Standard
30370 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30371 uses a bibliography processor,
30372 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30373 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30374 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30376 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30377 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30380 \begin_layout Standard
30381 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30383 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30384 You can do this on a general level in
30386 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30387 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30388 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30391 or for individual documents in
30393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30398 The following variants are available by default:
30401 \begin_layout Description
30402 biber a specific, modern processor
30403 \begin_inset Index idx
30406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30413 developed exclusively for
30417 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30423 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30428 makes use of; if you use the
30432 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30439 \begin_layout Description
30440 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30441 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30442 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30446 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30449 \begin_layout Description
30450 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30451 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30455 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30459 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30463 features are supported.
30466 \begin_layout Standard
30467 By default (with the
30473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30474 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30488 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30489 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30492 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30493 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30506 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30507 -based bibliography styles).
30508 This should suit most needs.
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30512 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30513 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30514 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30519 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30520 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30521 You can adjust it in
30523 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30524 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30525 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30531 \begin_layout Standard
30532 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30533 can add below the selection.
30534 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30535 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30541 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30557 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30559 These are explained in detail in section
30561 Customizing Bibliographies
30565 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30570 Additional Features
30575 \begin_layout Subsection
30577 \begin_inset Index idx
30580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 Bibliography ! Citation format
30587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30589 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30596 \begin_layout Standard
30597 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30602 \begin_inset space \space{}
30605 numerical citation (as
30606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30613 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30621 ) or author-year citations (as
30622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30631 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30635 \begin_layout Standard
30636 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30640 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30644 \begin_inset Index idx
30647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30648 Document ! Settings
30653 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30659 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30660 labels, is there to use
30663 \begin_inset space ~
30674 \begin_inset space ~
30679 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30682 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30689 \begin_layout Standard
30690 With a bibliography database (see
30691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30693 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30700 ) one has in contrary to the
30704 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30705 These style formats are available:
30708 \begin_layout Description
30710 \begin_inset space ~
30713 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30714 -based approached without any additional packages
30715 (simple numeric citations).
30718 \begin_layout Description
30719 Biblatex loads the package
30724 \begin_inset Index idx
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30729 packages ! biblatex
30734 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30736 Biblatex citation style
30740 Biblatex bibliography style
30743 Options to the package
30747 can be entered in the
30754 \begin_layout Description
30756 \begin_inset space ~
30760 \begin_inset space ~
30763 mode) loads the package
30767 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30768 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30780 behavior very closely.
30785 this option has some additional styles.
30790 styles are also supported by this variant.
30793 \begin_layout Description
30795 \begin_inset space ~
30798 (BibTeX) loads the package
30803 \begin_inset Index idx
30806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30813 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30816 \begin_layout Description
30818 \begin_inset space ~
30821 (BibTeX) loads the package
30826 \begin_inset Index idx
30829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30836 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30839 \begin_layout Standard
30848 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30850 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30859 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30861 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30862 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30864 Biblatex citation style
30867 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30873 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30877 \begin_layout Standard
30878 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30879 are available in the
30884 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30885 a name prefix such as
30886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30901 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30906 \begin_inset space \space{}
30910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30921 \begin_layout Standard
30922 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30928 \begin_inset space \space{}
30931 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30937 \begin_inset space \space{}
30941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30953 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30957 \begin_inset space ~
30965 \begin_inset space ~
30971 Here is a simple example where the text
30972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30976 \begin_inset space ~
30980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30983 appears after the reference:
30986 \begin_layout Quote
30988 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30991 key "latexcompanion"
30999 \begin_layout Standard
31000 All styles except for
31004 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31014 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31018 \begin_layout Standard
31019 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31020 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31021 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31026 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31027 multi-citation (so-called
31028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31031 qualified citation lists
31032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31038 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31043 dialog will display three columns in the field
31050 \begin_inset space ~
31058 \begin_inset space ~
31066 \begin_inset space ~
31072 If you double-click on an item's
31075 \begin_inset space ~
31083 \begin_inset space ~
31088 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31091 General text before
31097 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31100 \begin_layout Section
31102 \begin_inset Index idx
31105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31121 \begin_layout Standard
31122 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31126 \begin_inset space ~
31131 or the toolbar button
31138 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31139 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31140 by \SpecialChar LyX
31141 as the index entry.
31144 \begin_layout Standard
31145 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31148 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31150 \begin_inset space ~
31156 A light blue box labeled
31157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31168 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31169 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31173 \begin_layout Standard
31174 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31175 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31176 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31177 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31179 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31181 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31189 \begin_layout Subsection
31190 Grouping Index Entries
31191 \begin_inset Index idx
31194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31203 \begin_layout Standard
31204 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31206 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31207 lists under the entry
31208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31216 First we create the entry
31217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31225 \begin_inset space ~
31229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31231 reference "subsec:Lists"
31236 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31237 \begin_inset space ~
31241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31243 reference "sec:Itemize"
31247 , we insert the command
31250 \begin_layout Standard
31256 \begin_layout Standard
31260 \begin_layout Standard
31266 \begin_layout Standard
31267 for the enumerated list in section
31268 \begin_inset space ~
31272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31274 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31281 \begin_layout Standard
31282 The exclamation mark
31283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31290 marks the grouping levels.
31291 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31292 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31293 If we don't have an index entry for
31294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31301 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31304 \begin_layout Subsection
31306 \begin_inset Index idx
31309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31310 Index ! Page ranges
31318 \begin_layout Standard
31319 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31321 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31322 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31323 an index entry in section
31324 \begin_inset space ~
31328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31330 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31337 \begin_layout Standard
31340 Paragraph environments|(
31343 \begin_layout Standard
31344 and another entry at the end of section
31345 \begin_inset space ~
31349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31351 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31358 \begin_layout Standard
31361 Paragraph environments|)
31364 \begin_layout Standard
31366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31389 respectively start and end the index range.
31390 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31391 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31392 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31393 An example is the index entry
31394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31397 Document ! Settings
31398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31404 \begin_layout Subsection
31406 \begin_inset Index idx
31409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31410 Index ! Cross referencing
31418 \begin_layout Standard
31419 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31420 We referred for example in the index entry
31421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31429 \begin_inset space ~
31433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31435 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31439 ) to the index entry
31440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31447 in the same section using the entry
31450 \begin_layout Standard
31453 GIF|see{Image formats}
31456 \begin_layout Standard
31457 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31459 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31460 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31463 \begin_layout Subsection
31465 \begin_inset Index idx
31468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31469 Index ! Entry order
31477 \begin_layout Standard
31478 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31479 follow the rules for the index order.
31480 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31486 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31488 \begin_inset space ~
31492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31494 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31503 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31504 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31529 \begin_inset Index idx
31532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31533 Dummy entries ! maïs
31539 \begin_inset Index idx
31542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31543 Dummy entries ! maître
31549 \begin_inset Index idx
31552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31553 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31558 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31559 maïs, maison, maître.
31560 To achieve this, we use the command
31563 \begin_layout Standard
31566 previous entry@current entry
31569 \begin_layout Standard
31570 In our case we want to have
31571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31586 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31589 \begin_layout Standard
31595 \begin_layout Standard
31596 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31597 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31599 See the next subsection for an example.
31602 \begin_layout Subsection
31604 \begin_inset Index idx
31607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31608 Index ! Entry layout
31616 \begin_layout Standard
31617 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31618 \begin_inset Index idx
31621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31624 This is an italic dummy entry
31629 You can also format the page number using the character
31630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31637 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31638 -command without a backslash.
31639 We can write for example
31642 \begin_layout Standard
31645 italic page number:|textit
31648 \begin_layout Standard
31649 to get the page number in italic.
31650 \begin_inset Index idx
31653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31654 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31659 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31660 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31678 \begin_inset space ~
31684 Have a look at section
31685 \begin_inset space ~
31689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31691 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31695 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31699 \begin_layout Standard
31700 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31708 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31712 to generate the index, see section
31713 \begin_inset space ~
31717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31719 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31728 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31733 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31734 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31737 key "latexcompanion"
31750 \begin_layout Standard
31751 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31753 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31754 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31755 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31756 If so, put the following in the preamble
31759 \begin_layout Standard
31771 \begin_layout Standard
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31781 \begin_layout Standard
31782 in the index entry.
31783 \begin_inset Index idx
31786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31787 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31792 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31793 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31794 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31798 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31799 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31800 a bold font for all index entries.
31801 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31813 documentation for details,
31814 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31816 key "makeindex,xindy"
31824 \begin_layout Subsection
31826 \begin_inset Index idx
31829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31838 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31845 \begin_layout Standard
31846 If the index generation program
31850 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31851 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31855 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31856 distribution, is used.
31860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31865 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31866 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31867 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31868 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31869 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31879 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31881 dialog, see section
31882 \begin_inset space ~
31886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31888 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31893 The available options are listed and explained in
31894 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31896 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31902 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31906 \begin_layout Standard
31907 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31908 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31912 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31916 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31917 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31920 \begin_layout Subsection
31924 \begin_layout Standard
31925 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31926 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31934 next to the standard index.
31936 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31937 that add this feature.
31944 \begin_inset Index idx
31947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31949 packages ! splitidx
31954 package to generate multiple indexes.
31955 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31961 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31963 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31971 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31972 style, but it also includes
31973 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31974 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31982 \begin_layout Standard
31983 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31984 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31990 and select the option
31992 Use multiple Indexes
31999 already contains the standard index
32000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32008 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32009 also appear as a heading) to the
32013 input field and press the
32018 The new index now also appears in the list.
32019 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32020 label color to the new index.
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32024 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32034 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32035 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32036 are additional features:
32039 \begin_layout Itemize
32040 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32041 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32044 \begin_layout Itemize
32045 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32046 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32051 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32052 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32053 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32054 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32057 \begin_layout Itemize
32062 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32063 code in the name of the index.
32066 \begin_layout Section
32067 Nomenclature/Glossary
32068 \begin_inset Index idx
32071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32078 \begin_inset Index idx
32081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32112 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32119 \begin_layout Standard
32120 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32121 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32122 called nomenclature or glossary.
32125 \begin_layout Standard
32126 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32133 \begin_inset Index idx
32136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32144 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32153 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32157 \begin_layout Standard
32158 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32159 and then use the menu
32161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32167 \begin_inset space ~
32172 or the toolbar button
32175 arg "nomencl-insert"
32180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32191 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32194 \begin_layout Standard
32195 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32196 The first is the term or
32200 that you wish to define.
32205 of the term or symbol.
32208 \begin_layout Standard
32209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32217 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32218 code for nomenclature entries the option
32222 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32230 \begin_layout Subsection
32231 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32232 \begin_inset Index idx
32235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32236 Nomenclature ! Layout
32244 \begin_layout Standard
32245 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32249 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32256 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32264 \begin_inset Newline newline
32272 \begin_inset Newline newline
32278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32285 character starts/ends the formula.
32286 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32287 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32299 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32309 \begin_layout Standard
32310 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32311 syntax is given in section
32312 \begin_inset space ~
32316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32318 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32325 \begin_layout Standard
32329 \begin_inset space ~
32334 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32336 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32341 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32348 in this document is:
32349 \begin_inset Newline newline
32354 dummy entry for the character
32359 \begin_inset Newline newline
32371 \begin_inset space ~
32381 font use the command
32410 \begin_layout Standard
32411 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32416 \begin_inset space \space{}
32420 \begin_inset Newline newline
32436 \begin_inset Newline newline
32439 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32440 This command will make the font of all symbols
32447 \begin_inset space ~
32455 \begin_layout Standard
32456 If the characters |
32457 \begin_inset space \space{}
32461 \begin_inset space \space{}
32465 \begin_inset space \space{}
32469 \begin_inset space \space{}
32473 \begin_inset space \space{}
32476 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32477 code they need to be escaped
32478 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32479 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32480 LatexCommand nomenclature
32481 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32482 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32490 \begin_layout Subsection
32491 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32492 \begin_inset Index idx
32495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32496 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32504 \begin_layout Standard
32505 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32506 -code of the symbol
32508 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32510 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32513 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32514 LatexCommand nomenclature
32516 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32524 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32528 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32529 LatexCommand nomenclature
32532 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32538 They will be sorted by
32539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32565 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32568 will be sorted before the
32572 since the character
32573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32580 is considered in sorting.
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32584 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32587 \begin_inset space ~
32592 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32593 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32595 For the example given, you can insert
32599 in this field for the
32600 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32607 will be located before
32608 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32614 \begin_layout Standard
32615 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32630 \begin_layout Subsection
32631 Nomenclature Options
32632 \begin_inset Index idx
32635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32636 Nomenclature ! Options
32642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32644 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32651 \begin_layout Standard
32656 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32657 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32660 \begin_layout Description
32661 refeq Appends the phrase
32662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32677 to every nomenclature entry, where
32683 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32686 \begin_layout Description
32687 refpage Appends the phrase
32688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32703 to every nomenclature entry, where
32709 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32712 \begin_layout Description
32713 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32716 \begin_layout Standard
32717 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32718 class options list in the
32720 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32724 In this document the options
32731 \begin_layout Standard
32732 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32738 \begin_layout Standard
32739 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32740 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32745 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32748 \begin_layout Description
32758 \begin_layout Description
32761 nomrefpage Like the
32768 \begin_layout Description
32771 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32780 \begin_layout Description
32784 \begin_inset space ~
32790 \begin_inset space ~
32795 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32798 \begin_layout Standard
32800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32807 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32808 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32812 \begin_layout Standard
32821 \begin_inset Newline newline
32827 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32831 \begin_inset space ~
32843 unskip, see equation
32846 \begin_inset Newline newline
32853 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32854 \begin_inset Newline newline
32860 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32864 \begin_inset space ~
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32882 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32885 \begin_inset space ~
32890 in the document settings under
32893 \begin_inset space ~
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32909 \begin_inset Newline newline
32913 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32917 \begin_inset space ~
32929 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32931 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32932 \begin_inset Newline newline
32939 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32940 \begin_inset Newline newline
32944 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32948 \begin_inset space ~
32960 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
32965 \begin_layout Subsection
32966 Printing the Nomenclature
32967 \begin_inset Index idx
32970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32971 Nomenclature ! Printing
32979 \begin_layout Standard
32980 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32982 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32983 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32999 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33000 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33001 You can choose between these settings:
33004 \begin_layout Description
33005 Default a space of 1
33006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33012 \begin_layout Description
33014 \begin_inset space ~
33018 \begin_inset space ~
33021 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33024 \begin_layout Description
33025 Custom custom space
33028 \begin_layout Standard
33029 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33038 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33046 For example, in order to change the name to
33050 , add the following line to the preamble:
33053 \begin_layout Standard
33066 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33069 \begin_layout Standard
33070 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33071 \begin_inset Newline newline
33086 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33089 \begin_layout Subsection
33090 Nomenclature Program
33091 \begin_inset Index idx
33094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33095 Nomenclature ! Program
33101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33103 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33110 \begin_layout Standard
33116 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33117 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33119 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33124 by adding options, see section
33125 \begin_inset space ~
33129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33131 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33136 The available options are listed and explained in
33137 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33139 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33147 \begin_layout Section
33149 \begin_inset Index idx
33152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33159 \begin_inset Index idx
33162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33163 Document ! Branches
33169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33171 name "sec:Branches"
33178 \begin_layout Standard
33179 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33180 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33181 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33182 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33185 \begin_layout Standard
33186 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33187 allows you to put text into branches.
33188 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33189 To create a branch, either select the menu
33191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33192 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33195 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33204 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33205 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33206 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33207 and whether the name of the branch should
33208 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33209 (see below for an example).
33210 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33211 to the name of the other) and to add
33212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33224 \begin_inset space ~
33227 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33228 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33231 \begin_layout Standard
33232 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33233 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33238 where you can choose a branch.
33239 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33243 \begin_layout Standard
33244 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33245 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33248 \begin_layout Standard
33249 \begin_inset Branch Question
33253 \begin_layout Standard
33258 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33266 \begin_layout Standard
33267 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33271 \begin_layout Standard
33276 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33284 \begin_layout Standard
33291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33292 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33295 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33296 Consider for example a file
33297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33304 which has the above branches.
33306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33313 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33337 branch were inactive,
33338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33353 branch was active, likewise
33354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33369 branch was active, and
33370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33373 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33377 if both branches were active.
33378 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33379 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33385 \begin_layout Standard
33386 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33392 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33393 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33397 \begin_inset space ~
33405 \begin_layout Standard
33406 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33410 \begin_layout Standard
33416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33423 branch is deactivated.
33429 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33435 \begin_layout Standard
33436 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33437 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33438 definitions for each branch.
33439 For example you can define for the question branch
33443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33444 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33445 -syntax, see section
33446 \begin_inset space ~
33450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33452 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33464 \begin_layout Standard
33474 \begin_layout Standard
33484 \begin_layout Standard
33485 and for the answer branch
33488 \begin_layout Standard
33498 \begin_layout Standard
33508 \begin_layout Standard
33509 \begin_inset Branch Question
33513 \begin_layout Standard
33517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33545 \begin_layout Standard
33546 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33550 \begin_layout Standard
33554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33582 \begin_layout Standard
33583 Now it is possible to use the
33587 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33594 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33597 commands to obtain conditional output.
33598 Here is an example formula where only the
33605 \begin_inset Formula
33607 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33615 \begin_layout Standard
33616 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33624 \begin_layout Standard
33625 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33631 \begin_inset space \space{}
33634 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33636 For this advanced usage, see the
33642 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33647 \begin_layout Section
33649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33651 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33656 \begin_inset Index idx
33659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33668 \begin_layout Standard
33671 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33672 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33675 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33677 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33683 \begin_inset Index idx
33686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33688 packages ! hyperref
33693 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33694 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33695 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33696 part of the document.
33700 \begin_layout Standard
33701 The header information in the dialog tab
33705 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33706 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33707 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33708 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33712 \begin_inset space ~
33716 \begin_inset space ~
33721 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33722 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33723 and author entries.
33727 \begin_inset space ~
33731 \begin_inset space ~
33735 \begin_inset space ~
33740 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33743 \begin_layout Standard
33744 You can specify in the dialog tab
33748 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33753 \begin_inset space ~
33757 \begin_inset space ~
33761 \begin_inset space ~
33766 option allows long links to be split;
33769 \begin_inset space ~
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33777 \begin_inset space ~
33785 \begin_inset space ~
33790 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33793 \begin_inset space ~
33798 colors the different links.
33799 The default colors are:
33802 \begin_layout Labeling
33803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33808 for hyperlinks and URLs
33811 \begin_layout Labeling
33812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33820 \begin_layout Labeling
33821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33829 \begin_layout Standard
33830 but you can change these in the field
33835 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33838 \begin_layout Standard
33841 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33844 \begin_layout Standard
33849 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33850 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33851 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33854 \begin_layout Standard
33859 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33860 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33861 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33871 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33872 when opening the PDF.
33874 \begin_inset space ~
33877 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33878 \begin_inset space ~
33881 1 will only display the sections.
33884 \begin_layout Standard
33885 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33886 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33892 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33893 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33903 \begin_layout Section
33905 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33909 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33916 \begin_layout Subsection
33919 \begin_inset Index idx
33922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33930 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33932 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
33939 \begin_layout Standard
33940 As \SpecialChar LyX
33941 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
33942 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
33943 commands and constructs,
33946 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
33947 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
33948 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
33949 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33950 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
33951 cannot support all packages and
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33957 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33958 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
33962 Code box is created by the menu
33964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33966 \begin_inset space ~
33971 or by the toolbar button
33984 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33992 \begin_layout Standard
33993 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33995 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33997 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34002 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34007 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34014 , you can write the command part
34020 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34021 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34025 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34026 Code box behind the word.
34027 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34028 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34032 \begin_layout Standard
34033 \begin_inset Graphics
34034 filename clipart/ERT.png
34042 \begin_layout Standard
34046 \begin_layout Standard
34047 This is a line with a
34051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34074 \begin_layout Standard
34075 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34083 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34084 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34085 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34086 know that the command is finished.
34094 \begin_layout Subsection
34095 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34097 \begin_inset Argument 1
34100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34101 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34108 \begin_inset Index idx
34111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34121 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34128 \begin_layout Standard
34129 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34130 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34131 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34132 uses in the background.
34133 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34134 is based on commands, you can
34135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34143 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34144 any time if you know the right commands.
34145 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34146 is the end of the day.
34147 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34148 all caption labels bold.
34149 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34151 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34156 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34158 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34160 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34174 As result you find that the package
34179 \begin_inset Index idx
34182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34190 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34192 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34195 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34207 \begin_layout Standard
34212 usepackage[options]{package name}
34215 \begin_layout Standard
34216 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34217 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34218 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34219 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34222 \begin_layout Standard
34223 In your case the package name is
34228 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34233 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34234 So you add the command
34237 \begin_layout Standard
34242 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34245 \begin_layout Standard
34246 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34251 For more commands provided by the
34255 package, have a look at its documentation,
34256 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34271 \begin_layout Standard
34272 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34274 For example if you use a
34278 class, you don't need the package
34282 , you can instead write
34285 \begin_layout Standard
34290 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34295 \begin_layout Standard
34296 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34297 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34298 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34305 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34308 \begin_layout Standard
34309 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34310 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34312 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34313 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34314 Code box as described in the previous
34318 \begin_layout Standard
34319 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34320 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34323 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34325 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34333 \begin_layout Standard
34334 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34340 \begin_layout Standard
34344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34354 \begin_inset Note Note
34357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34358 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34366 \begin_layout Left Header
34367 \begin_inset Argument 1
34370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34390 \begin_inset Note Note
34393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34394 defines the header line as described below
34402 \begin_layout Center Header
34403 \begin_inset Argument 1
34406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34415 \begin_layout Right Header
34416 \begin_inset Argument 1
34419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34440 \begin_layout Left Footer
34441 \begin_inset Argument 1
34444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34465 \begin_layout Center Footer
34466 \begin_inset Argument 1
34469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34481 \begin_inset Newline newline
34485 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34491 \begin_layout Right Footer
34492 \begin_inset Argument 1
34495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34517 \begin_layout Section
34518 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34521 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34526 \begin_inset Index idx
34529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34530 Document ! Header/Footer line
34536 \begin_inset Index idx
34539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34548 \begin_layout Standard
34549 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34553 \begin_inset space ~
34564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34570 \begin_inset space ~
34576 As a second step add in the menu
34578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34579 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34588 Custom Header/Footerlines
34591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34595 This module offers the following 6
34596 \begin_inset space ~
34602 \begin_layout Description
34604 \begin_inset space ~
34608 \begin_inset space ~
34612 \begin_inset space ~
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34620 \begin_inset space ~
34626 \begin_layout Description
34628 \begin_inset space ~
34632 \begin_inset space ~
34636 \begin_inset space ~
34640 \begin_inset space ~
34644 \begin_inset space ~
34650 \begin_layout Standard
34651 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34652 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34655 \begin_layout Standard
34656 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34657 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34659 \begin_inset space ~
34663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34665 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34669 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34672 \begin_layout Standard
34673 \begin_inset Float figure
34679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34682 \begin_inset Tabular
34683 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34684 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34685 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34686 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34687 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34689 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34707 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34736 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34747 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34751 The normal text on the page goes here.
34752 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34754 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34755 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34760 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34769 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34798 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34809 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34827 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34845 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34850 name "fig:Page-layout"
34854 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34867 \begin_layout Standard
34868 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34876 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34880 \begin_inset space ~
34885 is set to “Default”.
34886 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34895 \begin_layout Subsection
34899 \begin_layout Standard
34900 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34901 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34902 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34903 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34905 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34907 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34910 \begin_layout Standard
34911 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34912 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34918 \begin_inset space ~
34926 \begin_layout Description
34929 thepage prints the current page number
34932 \begin_layout Description
34935 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34938 \begin_layout Description
34941 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
34944 \begin_layout Description
34947 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
34948 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
34951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34955 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34958 because it usually goes in a left header.
34961 \begin_layout Description
34964 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
34965 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34967 It is normally used in the right header.
34970 \begin_layout Subsection
34971 Default header/footer
34974 \begin_layout Standard
34975 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34976 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34977 footer has the page number.
34978 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34979 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34980 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34991 \begin_layout Subsection
34995 \begin_layout Standard
34996 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34997 Some pages are different.
34998 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34999 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35000 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35001 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35002 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35006 Header and footer decoration line
35009 \begin_layout Standard
35010 By default, you get a 0.4
35011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35014 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35015 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35027 in the following way:
35030 \begin_layout Standard
35037 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35040 \begin_layout Standard
35041 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35054 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35061 \begin_layout Standard
35062 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35064 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35069 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35080 Several header/footer lines
35083 \begin_layout Standard
35084 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35085 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35086 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35088 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35104 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35106 \begin_inset space ~
35114 \begin_layout Standard
35121 headheight}{height}
35124 \begin_layout Standard
35129 is a size in standard units (e.
35130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35134 \begin_inset space \space{}
35142 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35143 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35144 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35145 logfile with the menu
35147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35149 \begin_inset space ~
35157 \begin_inset space ~
35162 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35167 \begin_inset Index idx
35170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35172 packages ! fancyhdr
35178 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35179 for your header/footer.
35182 \begin_layout Subsection
35186 \begin_layout Standard
35187 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35188 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35189 This example consists of the following definition:
35192 \begin_layout Description
35194 \begin_inset space ~
35203 , empty optional argument
35206 \begin_layout Description
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35211 Header empty, empty optional argument
35214 \begin_layout Description
35216 \begin_inset space ~
35225 in the optional argument
35228 \begin_layout Description
35230 \begin_inset space ~
35239 in the optional argument
35242 \begin_layout Description
35244 \begin_inset space ~
35257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35261 \begin_inset Newline newline
35265 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35272 in the optional argument
35275 \begin_layout Description
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35286 , empty optional argument
35289 \begin_layout Description
35292 headrulewidth set to 2
35293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35299 \begin_layout Standard
35300 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35301 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35307 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35317 \begin_layout Standard
35318 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35324 \begin_layout Standard
35328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35332 pagestyle{headings}
35338 \begin_inset Note Note
35341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35342 switches back to page style with the default headings
35350 \begin_layout Section
35351 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35354 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35359 \begin_inset Index idx
35362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35369 \begin_inset Index idx
35372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35381 \begin_layout Standard
35383 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35384 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35385 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35388 \begin_layout Subsection
35392 \begin_layout Standard
35393 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35399 \begin_inset Index idx
35402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35404 packages ! preview-latex
35409 (on some systems named simply
35414 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35423 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35425 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35433 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35434 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35435 -package are automatically
35436 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35440 \begin_layout Subsection
35444 \begin_layout Standard
35445 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35446 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35448 activate the option
35451 \begin_inset space ~
35458 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35464 \begin_inset space ~
35468 \begin_inset space ~
35471 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35478 \begin_inset space ~
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35496 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35499 \begin_layout Standard
35500 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35505 \begin_inset space ~
35513 \begin_inset space ~
35521 \begin_layout Standard
35522 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35523 and when you finish
35527 \begin_layout Standard
35528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35536 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35537 generated by activating the option
35540 \begin_inset space ~
35546 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35554 \begin_layout Subsection
35555 Selected document parts
35558 \begin_layout Standard
35559 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35560 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35561 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35562 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35564 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35570 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35571 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35572 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35576 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35583 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35595 is explained in section
35597 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35602 \begin_inset space ~
35612 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35613 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35614 the final rotated boxes,
35615 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35616 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35618 Here is the result:
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35622 \begin_inset Preview
35624 \begin_layout Standard
35629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35633 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35639 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35649 height_special "totalheight"
35654 backgroundcolor "none"
35657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35682 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35688 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35710 \begin_layout Standard
35711 Previewing works also for colors.
35712 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35731 is explained in section
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35751 \begin_layout Standard
35752 \begin_inset Preview
35754 \begin_layout Standard
35758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35777 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35782 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35801 \begin_layout Standard
35802 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35808 \begin_layout Standard
35809 If \SpecialChar LyX
35810 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35811 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35812 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35813 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35814 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35815 the \SpecialChar TeX
35817 If \SpecialChar LyX
35818 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35819 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35821 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35822 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35823 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35826 \begin_layout Subsection
35831 \begin_layout Standard
35832 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35833 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35836 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35838 \begin_inset space ~
35843 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35845 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35847 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35848 's main window, then only this selection
35849 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35850 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35851 the source view window.
35856 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35857 ; but note that if you have
35858 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35860 not just the one which is open at the time.
35863 \begin_layout Section
35864 Advanced Find and Replace
35865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35867 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35872 \begin_inset Index idx
35875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35882 \begin_inset Index idx
35885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35894 \begin_layout Subsection
35898 \begin_layout Standard
35899 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35900 allows for searching of complex,
35901 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35903 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35904 The key-features are:
35907 \begin_layout Itemize
35908 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35909 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35910 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35914 \begin_layout Itemize
35915 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35916 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35917 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35918 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35921 \begin_layout Itemize
35922 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35923 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35924 outside of mathematics environments
35927 \begin_layout Itemize
35928 Search may be widened to a specific
35933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35940 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
35941 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
35948 \begin_layout Itemize
35949 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
35950 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
35951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35955 \begin_inset space ~
35958 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35961 \begin_layout Subsection
35965 \begin_layout Standard
35966 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35968 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35981 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35984 ) or the toolbar button
35987 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35993 Advanced Find and Replace
35998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36002 \begin_layout Standard
36008 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36017 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36020 arg "paragraph-break"
36024 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36025 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36029 arg "paragraph-break"
36032 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36036 searches backwards.
36039 \begin_layout Standard
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36048 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36057 \begin_inset space ~
36062 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36066 Searching for mathematics
36069 \begin_layout Standard
36070 Mathematical formulas, such as
36071 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36074 or something more complex like
36075 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36078 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36083 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36084 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36085 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36086 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36096 \begin_layout Standard
36097 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36098 This is done by switching to the
36102 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36107 This way, entering in the
36114 \begin_layout Itemize
36115 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36116 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36119 \begin_layout Itemize
36120 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36121 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36124 \begin_layout Itemize
36125 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36126 of it only within section headings.
36127 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36128 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36132 \begin_layout Itemize
36133 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36134 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36141 \begin_layout Standard
36142 The entries made in the
36146 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36149 \begin_inset space ~
36155 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36159 button or alternatively press
36162 arg "paragraph-break"
36169 while the cursor is in the
36172 \begin_inset space ~
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36183 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36187 \begin_layout Itemize
36188 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36189 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36197 with its typewriter version
36198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36212 \begin_layout Itemize
36213 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36219 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36231 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36238 (you may want to enable the
36241 \begin_inset space ~
36249 \begin_inset space ~
36254 options and disable the
36262 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36270 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36271 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36275 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36278 , or occurrences of
36279 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36283 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36289 \begin_layout Subsection
36293 \begin_layout Standard
36294 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36299 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36303 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36313 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36319 This is done with the context menu
36321 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36322 Insert Regular Expression
36324 while the cursor is in the
36329 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36330 expression matching rules
36334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36335 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36342 \begin_inset space ~
36345 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36346 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36352 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36353 same text in the document.
36354 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36355 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36358 \begin_layout Enumerate
36359 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36364 editor the fraction
36365 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36369 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36372 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36373 fractions with the given denominator.
36376 \begin_layout Enumerate
36377 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36389 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36394 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36395 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36396 Also, by inserting a
36397 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36400 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36401 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36404 \begin_layout Standard
36405 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36406 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36407 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36410 , and referring back to them through
36411 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36415 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36419 For example, try searching with the regexp
36420 \begin_inset Newline newline
36423 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36426 \begin_inset Newline newline
36429 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36432 \begin_layout Standard
36433 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36436 \begin_layout Standard
36437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36445 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36446 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36447 sub-expressions is absolute.
36449 \begin_inset space ~
36453 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36456 always refers to the first occurrence of
36457 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36460 in all entered regexps.
36468 \begin_layout Section
36470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36472 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36477 \begin_inset Index idx
36480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36489 \begin_layout Standard
36491 has a built-in spell checker.
36494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36501 key or the toolbar button
36504 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36507 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36508 beginning of the currently selected text.
36509 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36510 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36511 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36512 scrolled so that it is visible.
36513 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36514 n, if any could be found.
36515 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36519 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36520 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36523 \begin_layout Standard
36524 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36527 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36531 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36532 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36534 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36535 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36546 arg "dialog-show character"
36549 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36551 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36554 \begin_layout Standard
36555 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36556 can be downloaded from here:
36557 \begin_inset Newline newline
36561 \begin_inset Flex URL
36564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36566 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36572 \begin_inset Newline newline
36576 \begin_inset space ~
36579 files for each language.
36580 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36581 \begin_inset space ~
36584 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36585 's installation subfolder
36593 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36595 \begin_inset Newline newline
36598 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36599 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36600 but in most cases these are
36616 is the language code.
36619 \begin_layout Subsection
36623 \begin_layout Standard
36626 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36627 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36629 \begin_inset space ~
36632 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36635 you can set the following things:
36638 \begin_layout Description
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36643 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36644 should use for spell checking.
36645 Depending on your platform,
36655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36656 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36657 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36675 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36678 \begin_layout Description
36680 \begin_inset space ~
36683 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36684 will always use the given language
36685 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36688 \begin_layout Description
36690 \begin_inset space ~
36693 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36699 \begin_inset space \space{}
36703 This should normally not be needed.
36706 \begin_layout Description
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36712 \begin_inset space ~
36715 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36727 \begin_layout Description
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36732 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36733 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36734 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36735 appear in a context menu.
36736 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36740 \begin_layout Description
36742 \begin_inset space ~
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36753 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36757 \begin_layout Section
36759 \begin_inset Index idx
36762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36771 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36778 \begin_layout Standard
36780 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36781 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36793 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36803 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36805 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36806 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36807 which are available for many languages.
36810 \begin_layout Standard
36811 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36812 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36816 \begin_layout Subsection
36817 Setting up the thesaurus
36820 \begin_layout Standard
36829 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36833 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36838 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36844 \begin_inset space ~
36852 For instance, the US English files are named:
36855 \begin_layout Itemize
36859 \begin_layout Itemize
36863 \begin_layout Standard
36872 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36873 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36876 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36877 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36878 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36885 ) to the path where they are installed.
36889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36890 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36891 ies, typical locations are
36897 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36901 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36905 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36908 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36914 LibreOffice-<Version>
36921 On the Mac, the default location is
36923 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36924 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36925 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36926 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36927 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36928 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36936 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36937 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36938 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
36942 \begin_layout Standard
36943 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
36944 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
36946 \begin_inset Newline newline
36950 \begin_inset Flex URL
36953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36955 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
36963 \begin_layout Standard
36964 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36965 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36967 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36968 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36969 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36976 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36978 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36979 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36983 \begin_layout Standard
36984 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36986 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36989 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36995 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36998 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36999 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37007 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37008 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37009 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37011 \begin_inset space ~
37016 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37019 \begin_layout Subsection
37020 Using the thesaurus
37023 \begin_layout Standard
37024 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37026 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37029 or the toolbar button
37032 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37035 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37037 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37039 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37040 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37041 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37050 ), related terms (such as
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37062 ), compounds (such as
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37074 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37083 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37086 \begin_layout Standard
37087 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37088 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37093 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37094 the dictionary, such as the above
37098 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37103 \begin_inset space \space{}
37106 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37107 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37108 For example, looking up the word form
37112 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37117 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37122 \begin_inset space \space{}
37133 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37134 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37135 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37138 \begin_layout Section
37140 \begin_inset Index idx
37143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37150 \begin_inset Index idx
37153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37154 Document ! Change Tracking
37160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37162 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37169 \begin_layout Standard
37170 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37171 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37172 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37173 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37180 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37182 \begin_inset space ~
37190 \begin_layout Standard
37191 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37205 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37206 You can change the color in
37208 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37209 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37220 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37226 \begin_inset Index idx
37229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37230 Color ! Change tracking
37235 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37236 's status bar when the
37237 cursor is in changed text.
37238 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37241 arg "changes-merge"
37247 \begin_layout Standard
37248 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37250 \begin_inset Index idx
37253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37262 \begin_layout Standard
37263 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37269 \begin_layout Standard
37270 \begin_inset Graphics
37271 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37279 \begin_layout Standard
37280 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37290 \begin_layout Standard
37291 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37297 \begin_layout Standard
37298 \begin_inset Tabular
37299 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37300 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37301 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37302 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37312 arg "changes-track"
37320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37326 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37328 \begin_inset space ~
37331 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37342 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37351 arg "changes-output"
37359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37367 \begin_inset space ~
37370 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37410 Jumps to the next change
37416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37425 arg "change-accept"
37433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37441 \begin_inset space ~
37444 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37446 \begin_inset space ~
37455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37464 arg "change-reject"
37472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37478 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37480 \begin_inset space ~
37483 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37485 \begin_inset space ~
37494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37503 arg "changes-merge"
37511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37519 \begin_inset space ~
37522 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37524 \begin_inset space ~
37533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37542 arg "all-changes-accept"
37550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37558 \begin_inset space ~
37561 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37563 \begin_inset space ~
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37585 arg "all-changes-reject"
37593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37604 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37606 \begin_inset space ~
37610 \begin_inset space ~
37619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37643 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37645 \begin_inset space ~
37654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37677 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37695 \begin_layout Standard
37696 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37702 \begin_layout Standard
37703 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37723 \begin_layout Standard
37724 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37725 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37726 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37727 the next change after the current cursor position.
37728 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37729 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37730 step to the next change.
37731 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37736 to describe a change.
37739 \begin_layout Standard
37740 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37746 \begin_inset Index idx
37749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37757 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37759 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37766 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37770 \begin_layout Section
37771 Comparison of Documents
37772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37774 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37779 \begin_inset Index idx
37782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37783 Comparison of documents
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37792 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37795 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37799 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37800 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37802 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37804 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset space ~
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37825 \begin_inset space ~
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_inset space ~
37841 \begin_inset space ~
37845 \begin_inset space ~
37850 enables the change tracking option
37853 \begin_inset space ~
37857 \begin_inset space ~
37861 \begin_inset space ~
37866 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37869 \begin_layout Section
37870 International Support
37871 \begin_inset Index idx
37874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37875 International support
37883 \begin_layout Standard
37884 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37885 with any language you want.
37886 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37887 up \SpecialChar LyX
37889 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37891 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37899 \begin_layout Standard
37900 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37901 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37902 \begin_inset space ~
37906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37908 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37915 \begin_layout Subsection
37917 \begin_inset Index idx
37920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37927 \begin_inset Index idx
37930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37931 Document ! Settings
37937 \begin_inset Index idx
37940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37941 Document ! Language
37949 \begin_layout Standard
37952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37956 dialog lets you set
37958 the language, the quote style and character encoding
37963 \begin_layout Standard
37968 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37973 \begin_inset space ~
37978 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37979 For details about the different encoding options see section
37980 \begin_inset space ~
37984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37986 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37993 \begin_layout Subsection
37994 Keyboard mapping configuration
37995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37997 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38004 \begin_layout Standard
38005 If you have for example a U.
38006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38009 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38010 can use an alternate keymap.
38011 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38016 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38017 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38018 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38021 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38022 \begin_inset space ~
38026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38028 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38033 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38034 which one you want to use.
38037 \begin_layout Standard
38038 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38039 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38040 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38044 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38045 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38046 one to support the characters you want.
38047 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38054 \begin_layout Chapter
38057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38059 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38066 \begin_layout Standard
38067 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38068 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38069 topic inside the user's guide.
38072 \begin_layout Section
38074 \begin_inset Index idx
38077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38086 \begin_layout Standard
38091 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38094 \begin_layout Subsection
38098 \begin_layout Standard
38099 Creates a new document.
38102 \begin_layout Subsection
38106 \begin_layout Standard
38107 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38108 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38109 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38112 \begin_layout Subsection
38116 \begin_layout Standard
38120 \begin_layout Subsection
38124 \begin_layout Standard
38125 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38126 Click there on a file to open it.
38129 \begin_layout Subsection
38133 \begin_layout Standard
38134 Closes the current document.
38137 \begin_layout Subsection
38141 \begin_layout Standard
38142 Closes all opened documents.
38145 \begin_layout Subsection
38149 \begin_layout Standard
38150 Saves the actual document.
38153 \begin_layout Subsection
38157 \begin_layout Standard
38158 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38161 \begin_layout Subsection
38165 \begin_layout Standard
38166 Saves all opened documents.
38169 \begin_layout Subsection
38173 \begin_layout Standard
38174 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38177 \begin_layout Subsection
38181 \begin_layout Standard
38182 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38183 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38184 It is described in the section
38186 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38191 Additional Features
38196 \begin_layout Subsection
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38201 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38202 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38204 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38205 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38209 \begin_layout Standard
38210 When using the menu entry
38213 \begin_inset space ~
38218 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38222 \begin_inset space ~
38226 \begin_inset space ~
38230 \begin_inset space ~
38235 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38236 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38239 \begin_layout Subsection
38241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38243 name "subsec:Export"
38250 \begin_layout Standard
38251 You can export your document to various file formats.
38252 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38254 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38255 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38256 during its configuration.
38259 \begin_layout Standard
38260 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38262 \begin_inset space ~
38266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38268 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38275 \begin_layout Description
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38284 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38289 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38290 \begin_inset Newline newline
38293 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38294 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38298 \begin_layout Description
38299 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38305 \begin_layout Description
38307 \begin_inset space ~
38310 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38316 \begin_layout Description
38317 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38318 's native DVI-format.
38319 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38320 files paths or file names in your document.
38322 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38329 \begin_layout Description
38330 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38331 in files paths or file names
38334 \begin_layout Description
38336 \begin_inset space ~
38343 ) DVI-format using the program
38345 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38348 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38352 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38360 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38368 \begin_layout Description
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38373 (cropped) the same as
38377 but with cropped page margins.
38380 \begin_layout Description
38382 \begin_inset space ~
38385 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38389 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38394 \begin_layout Description
38398 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38406 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38414 \begin_layout Description
38416 \begin_inset space ~
38420 \begin_inset space ~
38423 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38427 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38435 \begin_layout Description
38439 \begin_inset space ~
38448 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38449 source that is compilable with the program
38451 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38455 \begin_layout Description
38459 \begin_inset space ~
38464 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38465 source, additionally all images used in the document
38466 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38470 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38473 \begin_layout Description
38477 \begin_inset space ~
38482 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38483 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38484 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38492 \begin_layout Description
38496 \begin_inset space ~
38505 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38506 source that is compilable with the program
38512 \begin_layout Description
38514 \begin_inset space ~
38518 \begin_inset space ~
38525 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38526 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38532 \begin_layout Description
38534 \begin_inset space ~
38537 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38538 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38544 \begin_inset space \space{}
38549 \begin_inset space ~
38553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38568 represent the version number)
38571 \begin_layout Description
38573 \begin_inset space ~
38577 \begin_inset space ~
38580 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38581 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38582 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38586 \begin_layout Description
38587 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38588 's internal XHTML engine
38591 \begin_layout Description
38593 \begin_inset space ~
38597 \begin_inset space ~
38601 \begin_inset space ~
38605 \begin_inset space ~
38608 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38613 For the conversion the program
38622 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38625 \begin_layout Description
38626 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38631 \begin_layout Description
38633 \begin_inset space ~
38636 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38638 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38641 For the conversion the program
38650 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38653 \begin_layout Description
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38658 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38659 For the conversion the program
38668 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38671 \begin_layout Description
38673 \begin_inset space ~
38676 (cropped) the same as
38679 \begin_inset space ~
38684 but with cropped page margins
38687 \begin_layout Description
38691 \begin_inset space ~
38696 PDF-format using the program
38700 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38703 \begin_layout Description
38707 \begin_inset space ~
38711 \begin_inset space ~
38719 \begin_inset space ~
38724 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38729 \begin_inset space \space{}
38732 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38736 \begin_layout Description
38740 \begin_inset space ~
38745 PDF-format using the program
38747 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38750 , produces PDF-files directly
38753 \begin_layout Description
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38762 PDF-format using the program
38766 , produces PDF-files directly
38769 \begin_layout Description
38773 \begin_inset space ~
38778 PDF-format using the program
38782 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38785 \begin_layout Description
38789 \begin_inset space ~
38794 PDF-format using the program
38799 , produces PDF-files directly
38802 \begin_layout Description
38806 \begin_inset space ~
38814 \begin_layout Description
38818 \begin_inset space ~
38822 \begin_inset space ~
38827 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38828 and then exported as text using the program
38833 \begin_layout Description
38838 PostScript format using the program
38846 options see section
38847 \begin_inset space ~
38851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38853 reference "subsec:General-output"
38860 \begin_layout Description
38861 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38862 source and also code in the statistical programming
38876 it is possible to use
38880 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38884 \begin_layout Standard
38885 If one of the menu entries
38892 \begin_inset space ~
38901 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38903 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38905 \begin_inset space ~
38909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38911 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38916 \begin_inset Index idx
38919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38920 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38929 \begin_layout Subsection
38933 \begin_layout Standard
38934 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38935 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38938 \begin_inset space ~
38942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38944 reference "sec:Paths"
38949 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38958 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38959 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38960 's preferences as described in section
38961 \begin_inset space ~
38965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38967 reference "subsec:Converters"
38974 \begin_layout Subsection
38975 New and Close Window
38978 \begin_layout Standard
38979 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38983 \begin_layout Subsection
38987 \begin_layout Standard
38988 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38991 \begin_layout Section
38993 \begin_inset Index idx
38996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39005 \begin_layout Subsection
39009 \begin_layout Standard
39010 Described in section
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39017 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39024 \begin_layout Subsection
39025 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39028 \begin_layout Standard
39029 Described in section
39030 \begin_inset space ~
39034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39036 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39043 \begin_layout Subsection
39047 \begin_layout Standard
39048 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39049 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39052 \begin_layout Subsection
39056 \begin_layout Standard
39057 Selects the whole document.
39060 \begin_layout Subsection
39061 Find & Replace (Quick)
39064 \begin_layout Standard
39065 Described in section
39066 \begin_inset space ~
39070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39072 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39079 \begin_layout Subsection
39080 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39083 \begin_layout Standard
39084 Described in section
39085 \begin_inset space ~
39089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39091 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39098 \begin_layout Subsection
39099 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39102 \begin_layout Standard
39103 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39107 \begin_layout Subsection
39111 \begin_layout Standard
39113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595818
39114 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39119 \begin_layout Enumerate
39121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595876
39122 Customize text properties by means of the
39128 Customized\SpecialChar ldots
39132 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595580
39134 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595580
39137 escribed in section
39138 \begin_inset space ~
39142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39144 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595582
39151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595616
39153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595617
39157 \begin_layout Enumerate
39159 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595704
39160 Change the casing of selected text (
39175 \begin_layout Enumerate
39177 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599421
39178 Select custom character styles if provided by the document class or a module
39179 (in the case of this document:
39196 \begin_inset space ~
39200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39202 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39211 \begin_layout Subsection
39213 \begin_inset Index idx
39216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39217 Paragraph ! Settings
39225 \begin_layout Standard
39226 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39227 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39231 \begin_layout Standard
39232 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39233 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39240 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39242 \begin_inset space ~
39250 \begin_layout Subsection
39251 Table and Rows & Columns
39254 \begin_layout Standard
39255 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39256 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39257 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39260 \begin_layout Subsection
39264 \begin_layout Standard
39265 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39266 It will dissolve this inset.
39267 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39271 \begin_layout Subsection
39275 \begin_layout Standard
39276 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39277 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39280 \begin_layout Subsection
39281 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39284 \begin_layout Standard
39285 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39287 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39288 \begin_inset space ~
39292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39294 reference "sec:Nesting"
39299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39301 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39308 \begin_layout Section
39310 \begin_inset Index idx
39313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39322 \begin_layout Standard
39323 At the bottom of the
39327 menu the opened documents are listed.
39330 \begin_layout Subsection
39331 Open/Close all Insets
39334 \begin_layout Standard
39335 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39338 \begin_layout Subsection
39339 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39342 \begin_layout Standard
39343 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39346 \begin_layout Standard
39347 Math macros are described in the
39354 \begin_layout Subsection
39358 \begin_layout Standard
39359 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39360 \begin_inset space ~
39364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39366 reference "sec:Navigating"
39371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39373 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39380 \begin_layout Subsection
39384 \begin_layout Standard
39385 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39387 \begin_inset space ~
39391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39393 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39400 \begin_layout Subsection
39404 \begin_layout Standard
39405 Opens a window showing console messages.
39406 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39411 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39412 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39413 is processing the document.
39416 \begin_layout Subsection
39418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39420 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39425 \begin_inset Index idx
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39437 \begin_layout Standard
39438 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39440 All toolbars and the
39443 \begin_inset space ~
39448 can be turned on and off.
39453 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39465 \begin_inset space ~
39477 \begin_inset space ~
39482 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39486 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39493 \begin_layout Standard
39498 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39502 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39503 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39504 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39505 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39506 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39509 \begin_layout Standard
39511 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39518 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39525 \begin_layout Subsection
39529 \begin_layout Standard
39533 \begin_inset space ~
39537 \begin_inset space ~
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39549 \begin_inset space ~
39553 \begin_inset space ~
39558 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39559 's main window vertically while
39562 \begin_inset space ~
39566 \begin_inset space ~
39570 \begin_inset space ~
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39582 \begin_inset space ~
39587 will split it horizontally.
39588 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39589 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39590 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39591 three or more documents at the same time.
39592 To close a split view, use the menu
39595 \begin_inset space ~
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39607 \begin_layout Subsection
39611 \begin_layout Standard
39612 Closes a split view.
39615 \begin_layout Subsection
39619 \begin_layout Standard
39620 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39621 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39622 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39623 's main window fullscreen.
39624 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39625 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39628 \begin_layout Section
39630 \begin_inset Index idx
39633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39642 \begin_layout Subsection
39646 \begin_layout Standard
39647 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39648 \begin_inset space ~
39652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39654 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39665 \begin_layout Subsection
39667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39669 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39676 \begin_layout Standard
39677 Here you can insert the following characters:
39680 \begin_layout Description
39685 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39688 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39689 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39690 -packages you have installed.
39691 You can get a complete display by checking
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39700 \begin_inset Newline newline
39704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 Not all characters will be visible in the
39716 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39717 dialog (see section
39718 \begin_inset space ~
39722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39724 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39728 ) can display every character.
39736 \begin_layout Description
39737 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39741 \begin_layout Description
39743 \begin_inset space ~
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39750 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39751 \begin_inset space ~
39755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39757 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39764 \begin_layout Description
39766 \begin_inset space ~
39769 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39772 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39773 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39779 \begin_layout Description
39781 \begin_inset space ~
39784 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39787 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39788 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39794 \begin_layout Description
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39799 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39803 \begin_layout Description
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39808 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39812 \begin_layout Description
39814 \begin_inset space ~
39817 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39823 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39829 \begin_layout Description
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39834 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39838 \begin_layout Description
39840 \begin_inset space ~
39844 \begin_inset Index idx
39847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39854 \begin_inset Index idx
39857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39858 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39863 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39864 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39866 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39872 \begin_inset Index idx
39875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39883 \begin_inset Newline newline
39886 More information about this feature can be found in the
39892 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39898 \begin_layout Description
39899 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39901 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39902 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
39906 \begin_layout Subsection
39910 \begin_layout Standard
39911 Opens a submenu with the following options:
39914 \begin_layout Description
39915 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
39916 \begin_inset script superscript
39918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39927 \begin_layout Description
39928 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
39929 \begin_inset script subscript
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39940 \begin_layout Description
39942 \begin_inset space ~
39945 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
39946 \begin_inset space ~
39950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39952 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
39959 \begin_layout Description
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39964 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39971 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
39978 \begin_layout Description
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39983 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39990 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
39997 \begin_layout Description
39999 \begin_inset space ~
40002 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40008 \begin_inset space \space{}
40011 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40012 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40021 To insert a fraction use the command
40026 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40030 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40039 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40046 \begin_layout Description
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40051 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40058 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40065 \begin_layout Description
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40070 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40077 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40084 \begin_layout Description
40086 \begin_inset space ~
40089 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40096 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40103 \begin_layout Description
40104 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40111 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40118 \begin_layout Description
40120 \begin_inset space ~
40123 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40124 \begin_inset space ~
40128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40130 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40137 \begin_layout Description
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40142 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40149 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40156 \begin_layout Description
40158 \begin_inset space ~
40162 \begin_inset space ~
40165 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40174 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40181 for a usage example.
40184 \begin_layout Description
40186 \begin_inset space ~
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40193 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40194 \begin_inset space ~
40198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40200 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40207 \begin_layout Description
40209 \begin_inset space ~
40212 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40213 as described in section
40214 \begin_inset space ~
40218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40220 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40227 \begin_layout Description
40229 \begin_inset space ~
40232 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40233 \begin_inset space ~
40237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40239 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40246 \begin_layout Description
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40251 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40252 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40260 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40267 \begin_layout Description
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40272 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40279 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40286 \begin_layout Description
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40295 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40296 \begin_inset space ~
40300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40302 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40309 \begin_layout Subsection
40313 \begin_layout Standard
40314 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40339 are described in section
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40346 reference "sec:toc"
40355 is described in section
40356 \begin_inset space ~
40360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40362 reference "sec:Index"
40370 is described in section
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40377 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40383 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40386 is described in section
40387 \begin_inset space ~
40391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40393 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40400 \begin_layout Subsection
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40405 To insert floats, as described in section
40406 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40412 reference "sec:Floats"
40416 and in detail the chapter
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40431 \begin_layout Subsection
40435 \begin_layout Standard
40436 To insert notes, described in section
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40443 reference "sec:Notes"
40450 \begin_layout Subsection
40454 \begin_layout Standard
40455 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40457 Branches are described in section
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40464 reference "sec:Branches"
40471 \begin_layout Subsection
40475 \begin_layout Standard
40476 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40477 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40479 An example is the document class
40480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40487 with three custom insets.
40490 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40494 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40500 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40503 \begin_layout Subsection
40505 \begin_inset Index idx
40508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40517 \begin_layout Standard
40518 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40520 For more information see chapter
40522 External Document Parts
40525 \begin_inset space ~
40531 \begin_layout Subsection
40533 \begin_inset Index idx
40536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40545 \begin_layout Standard
40546 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40547 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40554 \begin_inset space ~
40562 \begin_layout Subsection
40566 \begin_layout Standard
40571 dialog as described in section
40572 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40578 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40585 \begin_layout Subsection
40589 \begin_layout Standard
40594 as described in section
40595 \begin_inset space ~
40599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40601 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40608 \begin_layout Subsection
40612 \begin_layout Standard
40617 as described in section
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40624 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40631 \begin_layout Subsection
40633 \begin_inset Index idx
40636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40643 \begin_inset Index idx
40646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40647 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
40657 Floats are described in section
40658 \begin_inset space ~
40662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40664 reference "sec:Floats"
40668 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
40670 Multi-page Captions
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40683 \begin_layout Subsection
40687 \begin_layout Standard
40688 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40689 \begin_inset space ~
40693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40695 reference "sec:Index"
40702 \begin_layout Subsection
40706 \begin_layout Standard
40707 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40708 \begin_inset space ~
40712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40714 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40721 \begin_layout Subsection
40725 \begin_layout Standard
40726 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
40727 Tables are described in section
40728 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40734 reference "sec:Tables"
40738 and in detail in the chapter
40745 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_layout Subsection
40757 \begin_layout Standard
40763 Graphics are described in section
40764 \begin_inset space ~
40768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40770 reference "sec:Graphics"
40777 \begin_layout Subsection
40781 \begin_layout Standard
40782 Inserts a URL as described in section
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40789 reference "subsec:URLs"
40796 \begin_layout Subsection
40800 \begin_layout Standard
40801 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40808 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
40815 \begin_layout Subsection
40819 \begin_layout Standard
40820 Inserts a footnote as described in section
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40827 reference "sec:Footnotes"
40834 \begin_layout Subsection
40838 \begin_layout Standard
40839 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40846 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
40853 \begin_layout Subsection
40856 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
40859 \begin_layout Standard
40860 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
40861 environments of the same type.
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40869 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
40873 for an explanation.
40876 \begin_layout Subsection
40880 \begin_layout Standard
40881 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
40882 title or caption of a float.
40883 Inserts a short title as described in section
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40890 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40897 \begin_layout Subsection
40902 \begin_layout Standard
40903 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
40904 Code box as described in section
40905 \begin_inset space ~
40909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40911 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40918 \begin_layout Subsection
40920 \begin_inset Index idx
40923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40932 \begin_layout Standard
40933 Inserts a program listings box.
40934 Program listings are explained in the chapter
40936 Program Code Listings
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40949 \begin_layout Subsection
40953 \begin_layout Standard
40954 Inserts the actual date.
40955 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
40960 \begin_layout Subsection
40964 \begin_layout Standard
40965 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40972 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40979 \begin_layout Section
40981 \begin_inset Index idx
40984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40993 \begin_layout Standard
40994 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40998 of the current document.
40999 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41002 \begin_layout Subsection
41006 \begin_layout Standard
41007 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41008 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41009 to jump, for example, between section
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41014 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41018 2.5 and use the submenu
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41048 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41052 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41058 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41061 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41064 \begin_layout Standard
41065 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41074 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41082 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41085 \begin_layout Subsection
41086 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41089 \begin_layout Standard
41090 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41094 \begin_layout Subsection
41098 \begin_layout Standard
41099 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41100 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41101 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41117 \begin_layout Subsection
41121 \begin_layout Standard
41122 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41125 The \SpecialChar LyX
41126 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41141 manual for a detailed description.
41144 \begin_layout Section
41146 \begin_inset Index idx
41149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41158 \begin_layout Subsection
41162 \begin_layout Standard
41163 Change Tracking is described in section
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41170 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41177 \begin_layout Subsection
41185 \begin_layout Standard
41186 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41187 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41188 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41190 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41191 to the clipboard or update the view.
41192 \begin_inset Newline newline
41195 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41199 \begin_layout Standard
41202 Open Containing Directory
41204 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41205 's temporary folder for the document.
41206 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41207 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41208 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41209 For example some journals require to send the
41213 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41217 \begin_layout Subsection
41218 Start Appendix Here
41221 \begin_layout Standard
41222 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41223 as described in section
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41230 reference "sec:Appendices"
41237 \begin_layout Subsection
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_layout Standard
41246 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41247 default output format for the document (menu
41249 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41250 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41251 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41263 \begin_inset space ~
41267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41269 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41273 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41276 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41277 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41282 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41284 \begin_inset space ~
41287 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41293 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41305 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41309 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41310 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41312 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41313 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41318 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41323 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41333 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41338 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41339 when it is first configured.
41340 The default output format is
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41351 \begin_layout Subsection
41352 View (Other Formats)
41355 \begin_layout Standard
41356 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41357 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41358 actual document with an external program.
41359 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41360 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41361 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41363 All possible formats are listed in section
41364 \begin_inset space ~
41368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41370 reference "subsec:Export"
41375 You should at least see the menu entry
41380 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41382 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41390 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41395 \begin_inset Index idx
41398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41399 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41408 \begin_layout Standard
41409 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41410 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41412 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41413 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41415 \begin_inset space ~
41418 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41423 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41433 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41438 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41439 when it is first configured.
41442 \begin_layout Subsection
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41450 \begin_layout Standard
41451 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41452 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41455 \begin_layout Subsection
41456 Update (Other Formats)
41459 \begin_layout Standard
41460 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41461 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41464 \begin_layout Subsection
41465 View Master Document
41468 \begin_layout Standard
41469 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41490 manual for more information on this topic).
41491 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41492 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41505 generates the output of the whole book, while
41509 will just output the chapter alone.
41512 \begin_layout Standard
41513 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41514 in the document settings (menu
41516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41517 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41518 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41536 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41540 ) or in the preferences (menu
41542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41543 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41545 \begin_inset space ~
41548 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41553 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41555 \begin_inset space ~
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41571 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41578 \begin_layout Subsection
41579 Update Master Document
41582 \begin_layout Standard
41583 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41599 \begin_inset space ~
41604 manual for more information on this topic).
41605 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
41606 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
41609 \begin_layout Standard
41610 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41611 in the document settings (menu
41613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41614 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41615 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41627 \begin_inset space ~
41631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41633 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41637 ) or in the preferences (menu
41639 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41640 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41645 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41650 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41652 \begin_inset space ~
41656 \begin_inset space ~
41662 \begin_inset space ~
41666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41668 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41675 \begin_layout Subsection
41677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41679 name "subsec:Compressed"
41686 \begin_layout Standard
41687 Un/compresses the current document.
41688 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41689 compression (see the
41691 Additional Features
41693 manual for details).
41696 \begin_layout Subsection
41700 \begin_layout Standard
41701 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41704 \begin_layout Subsection
41708 \begin_layout Standard
41709 The document settings are described in appendix
41710 \begin_inset space ~
41714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41716 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41723 \begin_layout Section
41725 \begin_inset Index idx
41728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41737 \begin_layout Subsection
41741 \begin_layout Standard
41742 Spell checking is explained in section
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41749 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
41756 \begin_layout Subsection
41760 \begin_layout Standard
41761 The thesaurus is described in section
41762 \begin_inset space ~
41766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41768 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
41775 \begin_layout Subsection
41777 \begin_inset Index idx
41780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41787 \begin_inset Index idx
41790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41799 \begin_layout Standard
41800 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
41801 the highlighted document part.
41804 \begin_layout Subsection
41810 \begin_inset Index idx
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41814 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41823 \begin_layout Standard
41824 Generates with the help of the program
41826 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41829 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
41830 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
41831 This feature is not available on Windows.
41834 \begin_layout Subsection
41840 \begin_inset Index idx
41843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41853 \begin_layout Standard
41854 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41859 \begin_inset space ~
41864 to see the full filename paths.
41867 \begin_layout Subsection
41869 \begin_inset Index idx
41872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41881 \begin_layout Standard
41882 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
41883 files as described in section
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41890 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
41897 \begin_layout Subsection
41899 \begin_inset Index idx
41902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41915 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41933 \begin_inset Index idx
41936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41937 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41946 \begin_layout Standard
41947 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
41948 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
41949 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41950 -packages and programs it needs; see
41952 \begin_inset space ~
41956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41958 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41965 \begin_layout Subsection
41969 \begin_layout Standard
41974 dialog as described in detail in appendix
41975 \begin_inset space ~
41979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41981 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41988 \begin_layout Section
41990 \begin_inset Index idx
41993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42002 \begin_layout Standard
42003 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42004 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42006 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42010 \begin_layout Standard
42014 \begin_inset space ~
42019 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42020 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42021 packages and classes found
42022 by \SpecialChar LyX
42024 \begin_inset space ~
42028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42030 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42037 \begin_layout Standard
42041 \begin_inset space ~
42046 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42051 \begin_layout Section
42053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42055 name "sec:Toolbars"
42062 \begin_layout Standard
42063 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42064 \begin_inset space ~
42068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42070 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42077 \begin_layout Standard
42078 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42079 This is described in the
42081 Additional Features
42086 \begin_layout Subsection
42088 \begin_inset Index idx
42091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42100 \begin_layout Standard
42101 \begin_inset Graphics
42102 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42110 \begin_layout Standard
42111 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42117 \begin_layout Standard
42118 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42135 \begin_inset Note Note
42138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42139 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42144 manual for more information.
42152 \begin_layout Standard
42153 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42159 \begin_layout Standard
42160 \begin_inset Tabular
42161 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42162 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42170 \begin_inset Graphics
42171 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42185 pull-down box for the environments
42198 \begin_layout Standard
42199 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42205 \begin_layout Standard
42207 \begin_inset Tabular
42208 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
42209 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42210 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42211 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42235 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42265 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42272 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42295 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42311 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42325 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42341 arg "spelling-continuously"
42349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42353 Spellcheck continuously
42359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42412 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42472 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42502 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42518 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42558 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42572 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42600 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
42608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42614 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42615 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
42622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42643 Emphasize text, function of the
42645 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42647 \begin_inset space ~
42650 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42680 Set text to noun style, function of the
42682 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42687 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42705 arg "textstyle-apply"
42713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 Format text using the current settings in the
42719 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42721 \begin_inset space ~
42724 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42757 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42759 \begin_inset space ~
42768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42777 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
42785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42805 arg "tabular-insert"
42813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42835 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
42843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42847 Toggle outline window on/off,
42849 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42865 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
42873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42877 Toggle math toolbar on/off
42883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42892 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
42900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42904 Toggle table toolbar on/off
42917 \begin_layout Subsection
42919 \begin_inset Index idx
42922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42931 \begin_layout Standard
42932 \begin_inset Graphics
42933 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
42941 \begin_layout Standard
42942 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42948 \begin_layout Standard
42949 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42953 \begin_layout Standard
42954 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42960 \begin_layout Standard
42961 \begin_inset Tabular
42962 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
42963 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42964 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42965 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43002 arg "layout Enumerate"
43010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43029 arg "layout Itemize"
43037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43083 arg "layout Description"
43091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43110 arg "depth-increment"
43118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43124 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43126 \begin_inset space ~
43130 \begin_inset space ~
43139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43148 arg "depth-decrement"
43156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43162 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43164 \begin_inset space ~
43168 \begin_inset space ~
43177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43186 arg "float-insert figure"
43194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43201 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43217 arg "float-insert table"
43225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43232 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43278 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43308 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43322 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43372 arg "nomencl-insert"
43380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43388 \begin_inset space ~
43397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43406 arg "footnote-insert"
43414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43436 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43485 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43487 \begin_inset space ~
43496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43505 arg "box-insert Frameless"
43513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43549 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43556 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43599 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
43607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43613 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43614 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43621 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43630 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
43638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43645 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43647 \begin_inset space ~
43656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43665 arg "dialog-show character"
43673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43679 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43681 \begin_inset space ~
43684 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43691 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43700 arg "layout-paragraph"
43708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43734 arg "thesaurus-entry"
43742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43748 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43762 \begin_layout Subsection
43763 View/Update Toolbar
43764 \begin_inset Index idx
43767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43768 Toolbar ! View / Update
43776 \begin_layout Standard
43777 \begin_inset Graphics
43778 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
43785 \begin_layout Standard
43786 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43792 \begin_layout Standard
43793 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43797 \begin_layout Standard
43798 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43804 \begin_layout Standard
43805 \begin_inset Tabular
43806 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
43807 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43808 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43809 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43810 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43840 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43849 arg "buffer-update"
43857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43863 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 arg "master-buffer-view"
43887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43895 \begin_inset space ~
43904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43913 arg "master-buffer-update"
43921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43929 \begin_inset space ~
43933 \begin_inset space ~
43942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43951 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
43959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43966 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43967 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43968 Synchronize with Output
43974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43998 View (Other Formats)
44004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44011 arg "update-others"
44019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44026 Update (Other Formats)
44039 \begin_layout Standard
44040 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44044 \begin_layout Subsection
44048 \begin_layout Standard
44049 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44050 \begin_inset space ~
44054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44056 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44060 , the table toolbar
44061 \begin_inset Index idx
44064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44073 \begin_inset space ~
44078 manual and the math macro toolbar
44079 \begin_inset Index idx
44082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44095 \begin_layout Chapter
44096 The Document Settings
44097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44099 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44104 \begin_inset Index idx
44107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44108 Document ! Settings
44116 \begin_layout Standard
44120 \begin_inset space ~
44125 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44126 is called with the menu
44128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44132 You can save your document settings as default with the
44134 Save as Document Defaults
44136 button in any dialog.
44137 This will create a template named
44141 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44142 when you create a new document without
44146 \begin_layout Standard
44151 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44152 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44155 \begin_layout Standard
44156 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44157 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44158 to find the one you are looking for.
44159 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44160 the submenus of the dialog.
44162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44166 \begin_inset space \space{}
44170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44177 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44178 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44179 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44182 \begin_layout Section
44186 \begin_layout Standard
44187 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44189 Document classes are described in section
44190 \begin_inset space ~
44194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44196 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44204 \begin_layout Standard
44208 \begin_inset space ~
44213 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44218 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44219 as a layout for a document class.
44220 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44222 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44231 \begin_layout Standard
44232 Some classes use special class options by default.
44233 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44237 and you can decide to use them or not.
44238 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44239 recommended you leave them untouched.
44244 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44245 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44250 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44252 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44259 \begin_inset Newline newline
44264 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44267 \begin_inset Newline newline
44270 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44271 distribution, see section
44276 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44278 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44291 \begin_layout Standard
44296 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44297 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44298 in the background if the child document
44299 is opened without its master.
44300 This way child documents are always compilable.
44301 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44316 \begin_layout Standard
44317 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44328 \begin_inset Index idx
44331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44333 packages ! prettyref
44339 \begin_inset Index idx
44342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44344 packages ! refstyle
44349 for cross-references, see section
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44356 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44363 \begin_layout Section
44367 \begin_layout Standard
44368 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44369 Please refer to the section
44372 \begin_inset space ~
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44385 manual for details.
44388 \begin_layout Section
44392 \begin_layout Standard
44393 Modules are explained in section
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44400 reference "subsec:Modules"
44407 \begin_layout Section
44411 \begin_layout Standard
44413 \begin_inset space ~
44417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44419 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44426 \begin_layout Section
44430 \begin_layout Standard
44431 The document font settings are described in section
44432 \begin_inset space ~
44436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44438 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
44445 \begin_layout Section
44449 \begin_layout Standard
44450 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44467 and whether it should be a
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44475 can also be specified here.
44478 \begin_layout Standard
44479 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
44480 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
44481 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
44483 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
44486 \begin_layout Standard
44489 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
44492 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
44493 justifies the text on screen.
44494 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
44498 \begin_layout Section
44502 \begin_layout Standard
44503 This dialog is described in sections
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44510 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
44515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44517 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
44524 \begin_layout Section
44528 \begin_layout Standard
44529 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
44530 \begin_inset space ~
44534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44536 reference "subsec:Margins"
44543 \begin_layout Section
44545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44547 name "sec:Language-encodings"
44552 \begin_inset Index idx
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44556 Language ! Encoding
44564 \begin_layout Standard
44565 The document language and quote styles are set here.
44566 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44567 (the \SpecialChar LyX
44569 is always encoded in utf8).
44570 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
44571 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
44572 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
44573 -command is not known for
44574 a particular character).
44577 \begin_layout Standard
44578 If you use the option
44583 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
44584 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
44585 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44587 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
44588 exactly one encoding.
44589 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
44592 \begin_layout Standard
44594 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
44595 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
44596 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44597 installation supports Unicode), choose
44598 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
44599 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44600 is quite incomplete, so
44601 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
44606 (when \SpecialChar LyX
44607 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44608 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
44609 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44610 -commands is not used, because all
44611 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
44612 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44613 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44614 , two new alternative engines
44615 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44617 Both engines support Unicode natively.
44619 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44638 \begin_inset space ~
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44650 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
44655 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
44659 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
44662 \begin_layout Standard
44666 \begin_inset space ~
44671 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44672 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
44674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44682 The possible settings are:
44685 \begin_layout Description
44686 Default uses the language package that is selected in
44688 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44689 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44699 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44706 \begin_layout Description
44707 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
44708 format you will use.
44709 In many cases this will be
44714 \begin_inset Index idx
44717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44725 If the newer package
44730 \begin_inset Index idx
44733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44735 packages ! polyglossia
44740 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44741 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44742 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
44744 this package will be used instead of
44751 \begin_layout Description
44753 \begin_inset space ~
44764 would be more appropriate.
44767 \begin_layout Description
44768 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
44769 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
44773 (for German texts), type in
44776 \begin_inset Newline newline
44781 usepackage{ngerman}
44784 \begin_layout Description
44785 None will not use a language package.
44786 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
44789 \begin_layout Standard
44790 Here is a list with the important encodings:
44793 \begin_layout Description
44795 \begin_inset space ~
44799 \begin_inset space ~
44803 \begin_inset space ~
44810 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44816 \begin_inset Index idx
44819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44821 packages ! inputenc
44827 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
44828 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
44829 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
44833 \begin_layout Description
44834 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
44836 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
44837 commands, which may result in a big
44838 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44839 -commands are needed.
44842 \begin_layout Description
44844 \begin_inset space ~
44848 \begin_inset space ~
44851 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
44854 \begin_layout Description
44856 \begin_inset space ~
44860 \begin_inset space ~
44863 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
44866 \begin_layout Description
44868 \begin_inset space ~
44871 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
44874 \begin_layout Description
44876 \begin_inset space ~
44880 \begin_inset space ~
44883 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
44884 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
44887 \begin_layout Description
44889 \begin_inset space ~
44893 \begin_inset space ~
44896 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
44900 \begin_layout Description
44902 \begin_inset space ~
44906 \begin_inset space ~
44909 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
44910 ISO-8859-13 encoding
44913 \begin_layout Description
44915 \begin_inset space ~
44919 \begin_inset space ~
44923 \begin_inset space ~
44926 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
44927 \begin_inset space ~
44933 \begin_layout Description
44935 \begin_inset space ~
44939 \begin_inset space ~
44943 \begin_inset space ~
44946 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
44947 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
44950 \begin_layout Description
44952 \begin_inset space ~
44956 \begin_inset space ~
44959 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
44960 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
44961 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44962 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
44963 \begin_inset space ~
44967 \begin_inset space ~
44973 \begin_layout Description
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44982 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
44983 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
44984 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44986 should try to use the encoding Unicode
44987 \begin_inset space ~
44991 \begin_inset space ~
44997 \begin_layout Description
44999 \begin_inset space ~
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45006 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45009 \begin_layout Description
45011 \begin_inset space ~
45015 \begin_inset space ~
45018 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45021 \begin_layout Description
45023 \begin_inset space ~
45027 \begin_inset space ~
45030 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45033 \begin_layout Description
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45038 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45041 \begin_layout Description
45043 \begin_inset space ~
45046 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45049 \begin_layout Description
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45055 \begin_inset space ~
45058 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45061 \begin_layout Description
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45073 \begin_layout Description
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45079 \begin_inset space ~
45082 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45085 \begin_layout Description
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45097 \begin_layout Description
45099 \begin_inset space ~
45103 \begin_inset space ~
45106 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45112 \begin_inset Index idx
45115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45122 , when using this, set the document language to
45127 \begin_layout Description
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45136 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45141 , when using this, set the document language to
45144 \begin_inset space ~
45150 \begin_layout Description
45152 \begin_inset space ~
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45159 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45165 \begin_inset Index idx
45168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45170 packages ! japanese
45175 , when using this, set the document language to
45180 \begin_layout Description
45182 \begin_inset space ~
45186 \begin_inset space ~
45189 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45194 , when using this, set the document language to
45199 \begin_layout Description
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45205 \begin_inset space ~
45208 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45213 , when using this, set the document language to
45218 \begin_layout Description
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45223 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45226 \begin_layout Description
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45232 \begin_inset space ~
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45239 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45242 \begin_layout Description
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45248 \begin_inset space ~
45252 \begin_inset space ~
45255 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45256 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45257 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45260 \begin_layout Description
45262 \begin_inset space ~
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45272 \begin_layout Description
45274 \begin_inset space ~
45278 \begin_inset space ~
45281 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45282 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45285 \begin_layout Description
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45294 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45300 \begin_inset Index idx
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45310 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45313 \begin_layout Description
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45323 \begin_inset space ~
45326 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45333 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45336 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45343 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45344 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45346 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45349 \begin_layout Description
45351 \begin_inset space ~
45355 \begin_inset space ~
45358 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45364 \begin_inset Index idx
45367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45374 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45377 \begin_layout Description
45379 \begin_inset space ~
45382 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45388 \begin_inset Index idx
45391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45393 packages ! inputenc
45399 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45403 \begin_layout Description
45405 \begin_inset space ~
45409 \begin_inset space ~
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45416 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45417 \begin_inset space ~
45423 \begin_layout Description
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45429 \begin_inset space ~
45433 \begin_inset space ~
45436 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
45437 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
45438 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
45442 \begin_layout Description
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45452 \begin_inset space ~
45455 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
45456 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
45459 \begin_layout Section
45461 \begin_inset Index idx
45464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45471 \begin_inset Index idx
45474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45481 \begin_inset Index idx
45484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45485 Color ! Shaded boxes
45491 \begin_inset Index idx
45494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45495 Color ! Greyed-out notes
45503 \begin_layout Standard
45504 Here you can alter the font color for the
45508 (default: black), for
45511 \begin_inset space ~
45516 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
45520 (default: white) and for
45523 \begin_inset space ~
45533 sets the color back to the default.
45536 \begin_layout Standard
45537 Clicking any button showing
45545 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
45546 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
45547 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
45548 later more quickly.
45551 \begin_layout Standard
45552 Note, if you change the
45555 \begin_inset space ~
45560 font color and use the option
45563 \begin_inset space ~
45568 in the document settings under
45571 \begin_inset space ~
45576 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
45577 \begin_inset space ~
45581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45583 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45590 \begin_layout Standard
45591 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
45597 \begin_layout Standard
45601 \begin_inset space ~
45610 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
45613 \begin_inset space ~
45616 Code after a forced page break:
45619 \begin_layout Itemize
45620 For the page color:
45621 \begin_inset Newline newline
45628 pagecolor{color name}
45631 \begin_layout Itemize
45632 For the text color:
45633 \begin_inset Newline newline
45643 \begin_layout Standard
45644 You are restricted to one of
45680 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45693 \begin_inset Newline newline
45696 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
45697 names to refer to them:
45700 \begin_layout Itemize
45706 \begin_inset Newline newline
45711 page_backgroundcolor
45714 \begin_layout Itemize
45718 \begin_inset space ~
45724 \begin_inset Newline newline
45732 \begin_layout Itemize
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45742 \begin_inset Newline newline
45750 \begin_layout Itemize
45754 \begin_inset space ~
45760 \begin_inset Newline newline
45768 \begin_layout Standard
45769 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
45772 \begin_inset space ~
45780 \begin_inset space ~
45788 \begin_layout Section
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 Here you can adjust the
45797 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
45801 as described in section
45802 \begin_inset space ~
45806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45808 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
45815 \begin_layout Section
45819 \begin_layout Standard
45820 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45826 \begin_inset Index idx
45829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 packages ! biblatex
45841 \begin_inset Index idx
45844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45856 \begin_inset Index idx
45859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45867 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45870 Sectioned bibliography
45872 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45878 \begin_inset Index idx
45881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45883 packages ! bibtopic
45893 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
45894 Finally, you can select a document-specific
45898 for the generation of the bibliography.
45899 For a further description of these possibilities see section
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45906 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45913 \begin_layout Section
45917 \begin_layout Standard
45918 Here you can define the
45922 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
45924 \begin_inset space ~
45928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45930 reference "sec:Index"
45937 \begin_layout Section
45941 \begin_layout Standard
45942 The PDF properties are explained in section
45943 \begin_inset space ~
45947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45949 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45956 \begin_layout Section
45960 \begin_layout Standard
45961 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
45962 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45968 \begin_inset Index idx
45971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45983 \begin_inset Index idx
45986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45998 \begin_inset Index idx
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 \begin_inset Index idx
46016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46028 \begin_inset Index idx
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46033 packages ! mathdots
46043 \begin_inset Index idx
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46048 packages ! mathtools
46058 \begin_inset Index idx
46061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46073 \begin_inset Index idx
46076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 packages ! stackrel
46088 \begin_inset Index idx
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46093 packages ! stmaryrd
46103 \begin_inset Index idx
46106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46108 packages ! undertilde
46113 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46116 \begin_layout Description
46117 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46118 -errors in formulas,
46119 ensure that you have this enabled.
46122 \begin_layout Description
46123 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46124 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46125 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46129 \begin_layout Description
46130 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46145 \begin_layout Description
46146 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46149 \begin_inset space ~
46161 \begin_layout Description
46162 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46173 \begin_layout Description
46174 mathtools is used for the math commands
46210 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46217 \begin_layout Description
46218 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46220 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46229 \begin_layout Description
46230 stackrel is used for the math command
46247 \begin_layout Description
46248 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46251 \begin_layout Description
46252 undertilde is used for the math command
46260 Accents for one Character
46269 \begin_layout Section
46273 \begin_layout Standard
46274 The float placement options are described in the section
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46285 \begin_inset space ~
46293 \begin_layout Section
46297 \begin_layout Standard
46298 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46300 Program Code Listings
46305 \begin_inset space ~
46313 \begin_layout Section
46317 \begin_layout Standard
46318 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46326 set to be used and set the
46331 The itemize environment is described in section
46332 \begin_inset space ~
46336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46338 reference "sec:Itemize"
46345 \begin_layout Standard
46346 You can furthermore specify a
46349 \begin_inset space ~
46354 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46355 command of the desired character.
46356 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46363 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46369 \begin_inset space \space{}
46373 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46383 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46384 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46387 \begin_layout Standard
46388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46396 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46397 -packages in the preamble (menu
46400 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46401 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46404 \begin_inset space ~
46410 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
46414 usepackage{textcomp}
46417 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
46421 usepackage{amssymb}
46431 \begin_layout Section
46435 \begin_layout Standard
46436 Branches are described in section
46437 \begin_inset space ~
46441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46443 reference "sec:Branches"
46450 \begin_layout Section
46452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46454 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
46461 \begin_layout Standard
46462 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
46465 \begin_layout Description
46467 \begin_inset space ~
46471 \begin_inset space ~
46474 Format: The format that is used when you enter
46475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46494 View Master Document
46495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46502 Update Master Document
46503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46510 menu or the toolbar.
46511 The default is set in
46513 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46514 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46516 \begin_inset space ~
46519 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46523 \begin_inset space ~
46527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46529 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46536 \begin_layout Description
46538 \begin_inset space ~
46542 \begin_inset space ~
46545 Output settings for the menu
46547 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46549 \begin_inset space ~
46555 For a detailed description see section
46557 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46562 \begin_inset space ~
46570 \begin_layout Description
46572 \begin_inset space ~
46576 \begin_inset space ~
46579 Options offers settings for the export format
46587 \begin_inset space ~
46592 will assure that the output follows exactly version
46593 \begin_inset space ~
46596 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
46600 \begin_inset space ~
46605 settings are described in detail in section
46607 Math Output in XHTML
46612 \begin_inset space ~
46621 \begin_inset space ~
46625 \begin_inset space ~
46630 is used for the size of equations in the output.
46633 \begin_layout Description
46635 \begin_inset space ~
46640 Save transient properties
46642 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
46643 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
46644 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
46648 \begin_layout Itemize
46649 the activation of change tracking
46652 \begin_layout Itemize
46653 the output of tracked changes
46656 \begin_layout Itemize
46657 the recording of the document directory path.
46660 \begin_layout Standard
46661 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
46662 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
46666 \begin_layout Section
46674 \begin_layout Standard
46675 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46677 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
46679 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46681 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
46685 \begin_layout Standard
46686 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46687 -syntax is given in section
46688 \begin_inset space ~
46692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46694 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
46701 \begin_layout Chapter
46707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46709 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
46714 \begin_inset Index idx
46717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46726 \begin_layout Standard
46727 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
46729 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46733 It has the following submenus.
46736 \begin_layout Section
46740 \begin_layout Subsection
46744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46745 User Interface File
46746 \begin_inset Index idx
46749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46750 Customization ! of toolbars
46756 \begin_inset Index idx
46759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46760 Customization ! of menus
46768 \begin_layout Standard
46769 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
46770 interface (ui) file.
46771 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
46779 \begin_layout Description
46784 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
46787 \begin_layout Description
46794 the menu entries in popup context menus
46797 \begin_layout Description
46802 specifies the toolbar buttons
46805 \begin_layout Standard
46806 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
46807 and edit the entries.
46810 \begin_layout Standard
46811 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
46823 entries must be finished with an explicit
46848 and in the case of the
46849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46861 The syntax for the entries is:
46864 \begin_layout Standard
46865 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46894 \begin_layout Standard
46896 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46899 All the \SpecialChar LyX
46900 -functions are listed in the menu
46902 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
46904 \begin_inset space ~
46912 \begin_layout Standard
46913 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46919 \begin_layout Standard
46920 For example, assuming you use the menu
46922 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46925 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
46929 \begin_layout Standard
46930 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46954 \begin_layout Standard
46956 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46971 to have the sixth bookmark.
46974 \begin_layout Standard
46978 \begin_inset space ~
46983 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
46984 's toolbar buttons.
46985 The currently available icon sets are compared in
46986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46989 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
46997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47001 \begin_layout Standard
47004 Enable tool tips in main work area
47006 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47014 \begin_layout Standard
47019 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47020 should display in the menu
47022 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47024 \begin_inset space ~
47032 \begin_layout Subsection
47036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47040 \begin_layout Standard
47043 Restore window layouts and geometries
47046 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47047 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47051 \begin_layout Standard
47054 Restore cursor positions
47056 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47060 \begin_layout Standard
47063 Load opened files from last session
47065 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47069 \begin_layout Standard
47072 Clear all session information
47074 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47075 sessions (cursor positions, names
47076 of last opened documents, etc.).
47079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47083 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47088 \begin_inset Index idx
47091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47100 \begin_layout Standard
47103 Backup original documents when saving
47105 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47106 it was saved the last time.
47107 It is stored in the
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47116 \begin_inset space ~
47120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47122 reference "sec:Paths"
47126 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47129 \begin_inset space ~
47135 The backup file has the file extension
47136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47150 \begin_layout Standard
47153 Backup documents, every
47155 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47158 \begin_layout Standard
47161 Save documents compressed by default
47163 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47164 \begin_inset space ~
47168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47170 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47175 This applies to newly created documents only.
47176 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47180 Windows & work area
47183 \begin_layout Standard
47186 Open documents in tabs
47188 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47192 \begin_layout Standard
47197 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47204 \begin_inset space ~
47208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47210 reference "sec:Paths"
47214 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47221 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47222 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47223 of \SpecialChar LyX
47225 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47226 instance is created for each file.
47229 \begin_layout Standard
47232 Single close-tab button
47234 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47244 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47245 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47246 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47250 \begin_layout Standard
47251 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47259 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47260 before the change takes effect.
47268 \begin_layout Standard
47273 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47275 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47277 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47281 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47282 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47283 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47286 \begin_layout Subsection
47288 \begin_inset Index idx
47291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47300 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47307 \begin_layout Standard
47308 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47312 \begin_layout Standard
47313 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47321 This section only deals with the fonts
47325 the \SpecialChar LyX
47327 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47330 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47331 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47342 \begin_layout Standard
47343 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47360 (depends on the system) as its
47363 \begin_inset space ~
47379 \begin_layout Standard
47380 You can change the font size with the
47387 \begin_layout Standard
47392 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47397 points have the size of 1
47398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47402 \begin_inset space ~
47406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47408 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
47413 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
47414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47418 The sizes are explained in detail in section
47419 \begin_inset space ~
47423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47425 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
47432 \begin_layout Subsection
47434 \begin_inset Index idx
47437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47438 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
47445 \begin_inset Index idx
47448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47457 \begin_layout Standard
47458 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
47459 by choosing an item in the
47460 list and selecting the
47467 \begin_layout Standard
47468 By checking the option
47472 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
47475 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47480 \begin_inset space ~
47485 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
47488 \begin_layout Subsection
47490 \begin_inset Index idx
47493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47502 \begin_layout Standard
47503 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
47507 \begin_layout Standard
47512 enables previewing snippets of your document.
47513 This feature is described in section
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47520 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47527 \begin_layout Standard
47528 Checking the option
47531 \begin_inset space ~
47535 \begin_inset space ~
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47544 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
47547 \begin_layout Section
47549 \begin_inset Index idx
47552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47561 \begin_layout Subsection
47565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47569 \begin_layout Standard
47572 Cursor follows scrollbar
47574 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
47578 \begin_layout Standard
47579 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
47580 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
47581 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
47584 \begin_layout Standard
47587 Scroll below end of document
47589 is self-explanatory.
47592 \begin_layout Standard
47593 In \SpecialChar LyX
47594 one can jump from word to word by pressing
47601 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
47603 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
47604 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
47607 \begin_layout Standard
47610 Sort environments alphabetically
47612 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47615 \begin_layout Standard
47618 Group environments by their category
47620 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47623 \begin_layout Standard
47628 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
47639 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47643 \begin_layout Standard
47644 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
47649 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
47650 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
47654 \begin_layout Subsection
47656 \begin_inset Index idx
47659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47666 \begin_inset Index idx
47669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47670 Settings ! Shortcuts
47678 \begin_layout Standard
47683 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
47685 Several binding files are available, among them:
47688 \begin_layout Description
47689 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
47692 \begin_layout Description
47693 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
47705 \begin_layout Description
47706 mac.bind a set of bindings for
47709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47717 \begin_layout Standard
47718 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
47723 , and binding files for special languages.
47724 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
47725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47729 \begin_inset space \space{}
47733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47741 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
47742 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
47743 will try to use the appropriate binding
47747 \begin_layout Standard
47748 Some binding files, like
47752 , only have a limited scope.
47753 When looking at the end of the file
47757 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
47760 \begin_layout Standard
47764 \begin_inset space ~
47768 \begin_inset space ~
47773 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
47774 in the selected key binding file.
47777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47781 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
47786 \begin_inset Index idx
47789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47790 Key Bindings ! Editing
47798 \begin_layout Standard
47799 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
47800 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
47801 functions and the bound shortcuts.
47802 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
47805 Show key-bindings containing
47808 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
47809 Insert there for example as keyword
47810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47817 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
47818 functions that contain
47819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47827 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
47828 All \SpecialChar LyX
47829 functions are also listed in the file
47834 that you will find in the
47841 \begin_layout Standard
47842 For example, to add the shortcut
47850 , select the function and press the
47855 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
47856 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
47859 \begin_layout Standard
47860 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
47861 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
47863 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
47864 function names as a semicolon separated list.
47866 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
47871 \begin_layout Standard
47872 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
47875 \begin_layout Standard
47876 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
47878 The syntax of the entries is:
47881 \begin_layout Standard
47887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47906 \begin_layout Standard
47907 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
47908 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
47909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47936 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
47937 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
47938 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
47939 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
47941 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
47945 , you needed to specify it as
47950 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
47953 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
47956 \begin_layout Subsection
47958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47960 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47965 \begin_inset Index idx
47968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47975 \begin_inset Index idx
47978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47979 Settings ! Keyboard Map
47987 \begin_layout Standard
47988 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
47989 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
47990 provides keyboard maps.
47991 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
47992 is a Romanian one, you can enable
47995 \begin_inset space ~
47999 \begin_inset space ~
48004 and select the keyboard map file named
48011 \begin_layout Standard
48020 keyboard map and, if you use the
48024 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48027 arg "keymap-primary"
48033 arg "keymap-secondary"
48036 respectively or toggle between them with
48039 arg "keymap-toggle"
48045 \begin_layout Standard
48046 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48054 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48063 \begin_layout Standard
48064 You can also specify the mouse
48066 Wheel scrolling speed
48069 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48073 Middle mouse button pasting
48075 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48076 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48079 \begin_layout Standard
48087 \begin_inset space ~
48091 \begin_inset space ~
48096 you can select a key for zooming.
48097 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48100 \begin_layout Subsection
48104 \begin_layout Standard
48105 Input completion is described in section
48106 \begin_inset space ~
48110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48112 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48119 \begin_layout Section
48121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48128 \begin_inset Index idx
48131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48138 \begin_inset Index idx
48141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48150 \begin_layout Standard
48151 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48152 are normally determined during
48154 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48157 \begin_layout Description
48159 \begin_inset space ~
48162 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48163 's working directory.
48164 It is the default when you
48175 \begin_inset space ~
48183 \begin_layout Description
48185 \begin_inset space ~
48188 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
48190 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48192 \begin_inset space ~
48196 \begin_inset space ~
48204 \begin_layout Description
48206 \begin_inset space ~
48209 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
48215 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48219 \begin_inset Newline newline
48223 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48235 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48236 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48244 \begin_layout Description
48246 \begin_inset space ~
48250 \begin_inset Index idx
48253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48259 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48260 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48261 \begin_inset space ~
48265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48267 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48275 will be used to save the backups.
48276 \begin_inset Newline newline
48279 Backup files have the ending
48280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48290 \begin_layout Description
48292 \begin_inset space ~
48295 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48296 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48298 \begin_inset Newline newline
48305 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48311 You can edit this file with the program
48320 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48321 in its preferences under
48324 \begin_inset space ~
48330 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48335 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48337 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48338 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48344 and \SpecialChar LyX
48345 need to be running the same time.
48346 \begin_inset Newline newline
48349 The pipe is also used for the
48353 feature, see section
48354 \begin_inset space ~
48358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48360 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48365 \begin_inset Newline newline
48368 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48369 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48370 \begin_inset Newline newline
48386 \begin_layout Description
48388 \begin_inset space ~
48391 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
48394 \begin_layout Description
48396 \begin_inset space ~
48399 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
48400 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
48401 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
48404 \begin_layout Description
48406 \begin_inset space ~
48409 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
48415 You only need to specify it if you are using
48419 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
48421 For \SpecialChar LyX
48426 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
48430 \begin_layout Description
48432 \begin_inset space ~
48435 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
48436 When \SpecialChar LyX
48437 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
48438 to find it on the system.
48439 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
48441 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
48443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48450 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
48451 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
48454 \begin_layout Description
48456 \begin_inset space ~
48459 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
48460 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
48461 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
48462 code or in the document
48464 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
48466 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
48467 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
48468 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
48469 scanned for the input files.
48470 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
48471 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
48473 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
48474 compilation may fail for some documents.
48477 \begin_layout Section
48481 \begin_layout Standard
48482 Here you can insert your
48491 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
48493 \begin_inset space ~
48497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48499 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48503 , to mark changes you make as yours.
48506 \begin_layout Section
48508 \begin_inset Index idx
48511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48512 Language ! Settings
48518 \begin_inset Index idx
48521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48522 Settings ! Language
48530 \begin_layout Subsection
48532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48534 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48541 \begin_layout Description
48543 \begin_inset space ~
48547 \begin_inset space ~
48550 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
48552 You can find its actual translation status here:
48553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48555 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
48563 \begin_layout Description
48565 \begin_inset space ~
48568 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
48569 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
48570 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
48571 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
48572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48588 The most widespread language package is
48593 \begin_inset Index idx
48596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48603 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
48605 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48606 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48607 come with the alternative
48613 \begin_inset Index idx
48616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48618 packages ! polyglossia
48623 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
48624 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
48630 The available selections are described in section
48631 \begin_inset space ~
48635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48637 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
48644 \begin_layout Description
48646 \begin_inset space ~
48649 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48650 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
48651 you can here specify the command to start the package.
48652 An example is the start command
48658 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
48660 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
48664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48680 selectlanguage{$$lang}
48685 \begin_layout Description
48687 \begin_inset space ~
48695 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
48696 command toggles the package on and off.
48699 \begin_layout Description
48701 \begin_inset space ~
48705 \begin_inset space ~
48708 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
48712 \begin_layout Description
48714 \begin_inset space ~
48718 \begin_inset space ~
48721 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
48725 \begin_layout Description
48727 \begin_inset space ~
48731 \begin_inset space ~
48734 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
48735 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
48736 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
48738 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
48745 \begin_layout Description
48747 \begin_inset space ~
48750 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
48752 When this option is not set, the
48755 \begin_inset space ~
48760 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48762 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
48765 \begin_inset space ~
48773 \begin_layout Description
48775 \begin_inset space ~
48781 \begin_inset space ~
48787 When it is not set, the
48790 \begin_inset space ~
48795 is set to the end of the document.
48798 \begin_layout Description
48800 \begin_inset space ~
48804 \begin_inset space ~
48807 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
48808 language will be underlined in blue.
48811 \begin_layout Description
48813 \begin_inset space ~
48817 \begin_inset space ~
48820 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
48821 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
48824 \begin_layout Description
48826 \begin_inset space ~
48829 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
48830 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
48831 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
48832 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
48835 \begin_layout Subsection
48839 \begin_layout Standard
48840 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
48841 \begin_inset space ~
48845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48847 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
48854 \begin_layout Section
48858 \begin_layout Subsection
48860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48862 name "subsec:General-output"
48869 \begin_layout Description
48871 \begin_inset space ~
48874 search Commands that will be used for the menu
48876 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48878 \begin_inset space ~
48884 For a detailed description see section
48886 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48891 \begin_inset space ~
48899 \begin_layout Description
48901 \begin_inset space ~
48904 Options Options for the program
48908 that is used for the export format
48913 \begin_inset space ~
48917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48919 reference "subsec:Export"
48924 Possible options are listed in the
48929 \begin_inset Newline newline
48933 \begin_inset Flex URL
48936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48938 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
48948 \begin_layout Description
48950 \begin_inset space ~
48954 \begin_inset space ~
48957 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
48960 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48961 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
48963 \begin_inset space ~
48969 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
48972 \begin_layout Description
48974 \begin_inset space ~
48978 \begin_inset Index idx
48981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48988 \begin_inset Index idx
48991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48992 Settings ! Date format
48997 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
48998 \begin_inset Newline newline
49002 \begin_inset Flex URL
49005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49007 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49013 \begin_inset Newline newline
49016 For example the format
49017 \begin_inset Newline newline
49021 \begin_inset Newline newline
49024 prints the date as day/month/year.
49027 \begin_layout Description
49029 \begin_inset space ~
49033 \begin_inset space ~
49036 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49037 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49040 \begin_layout Subsection
49046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49048 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49053 \begin_inset Index idx
49056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49057 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49066 \begin_layout Description
49068 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49070 \begin_inset space ~
49078 \begin_inset space ~
49082 \begin_inset space ~
49085 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49090 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49111 are used for Cyrillic.
49112 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49125 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49127 sets up in the background.
49128 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49133 \begin_layout Description
49135 \begin_inset space ~
49139 \begin_inset space ~
49143 \begin_inset space ~
49147 \begin_inset space ~
49150 options They only have an effect when the program
49154 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49157 \begin_layout Standard
49158 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49159 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49160 manuals of the applications.
49163 \begin_layout Description
49165 \begin_inset space ~
49168 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49169 \begin_inset space ~
49173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49175 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49182 \begin_layout Description
49184 \begin_inset space ~
49187 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49188 \begin_inset space ~
49192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49194 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49201 \begin_layout Description
49203 \begin_inset space ~
49206 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49207 \begin_inset space ~
49211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49213 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49220 \begin_layout Description
49226 \begin_inset space ~
49229 command Command for the program
49231 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49234 that is described in the section
49236 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49241 Additional Features
49246 \begin_layout Standard
49247 There are additionally the following options:
49250 \begin_layout Description
49252 \begin_inset space ~
49256 \begin_inset space ~
49260 \begin_inset space ~
49264 \begin_inset space ~
49269 \begin_inset space ~
49272 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49290 to separate folders.
49291 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49293 \begin_inset Index idx
49296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49303 \begin_inset Index idx
49306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49315 \begin_layout Description
49317 \begin_inset space ~
49321 \begin_inset space ~
49325 \begin_inset space ~
49329 \begin_inset space ~
49333 \begin_inset space ~
49337 \begin_inset space ~
49340 changes Removes all manually set
49346 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49347 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49349 \begin_inset space ~
49354 dialog when changing the document class.
49357 \begin_layout Section
49359 \begin_inset space ~
49363 \begin_inset Index idx
49366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49375 \begin_layout Subsection
49377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49379 name "subsec:Converters"
49384 \begin_inset Index idx
49387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49396 \begin_layout Standard
49397 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
49398 from one format to another.
49399 You can modify converters or create new ones.
49400 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
49407 \begin_inset space ~
49412 field and press the
49417 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
49421 \begin_inset space ~
49426 drop-down list, modify the
49430 field and press the
49437 \begin_layout Standard
49440 Converter File Cache
49446 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
49448 Maximum Age (in days
49451 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
49452 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
49455 \begin_layout Standard
49456 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
49457 definition, is described in the section
49468 \begin_layout Subsection
49470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49472 name "sec:File-Formats"
49477 \begin_inset Index idx
49480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49487 \begin_inset Index idx
49490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49499 \begin_layout Standard
49500 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
49510 programs that should be used for certain formats.
49513 \begin_layout Standard
49514 You can also define the
49516 Default output format
49518 that is used when you use
49520 View, Update, View Master Document
49524 Update Master Document
49530 menu or the toolbar.
49533 \begin_layout Standard
49534 More about formats and their options is described in the section
49545 \begin_layout Standard
49546 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
49548 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
49549 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
49550 This is done by specifying a
49555 More about this is described in the section
49566 \begin_layout Chapter
49567 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49569 \begin_inset Index idx
49572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49581 name "chap:Units-available-in"
49588 \begin_layout Standard
49590 \begin_inset space ~
49594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49596 reference "tab:Units"
49600 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49601 and used in this documentation.
49604 \begin_layout Standard
49605 \begin_inset Float table
49611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49612 \begin_inset Caption Standard
49614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49630 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49638 \begin_inset Tabular
49639 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
49640 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
49641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49642 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
49643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49796 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
49800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50067 scaled point (65536
50068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50135 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50259 % of original image width
50264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50348 \begin_layout Standard
50349 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50352 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50359 \begin_layout Bibliography
50360 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50361 LatexCommand bibitem
50368 The \SpecialChar LyX
50370 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50373 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
50379 \begin_inset Newline newline
50383 \begin_inset Flex URL
50386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50388 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
50396 \begin_layout Bibliography
50397 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50398 LatexCommand bibitem
50399 key "latexcompanion"
50404 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
50406 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50407 Companion Second Edition.
50410 Addison-Wesley, 2004
50413 \begin_layout Bibliography
50414 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50415 LatexCommand bibitem
50421 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
50424 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50428 Addison-Wesley, 2003
50431 \begin_layout Bibliography
50432 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50433 LatexCommand bibitem
50442 : A Document Preparation System.
50445 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
50448 \begin_layout Bibliography
50449 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50450 LatexCommand bibitem
50460 The \SpecialChar TeX
50464 Addison-Wesley, 1984
50467 \begin_layout Bibliography
50468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50469 LatexCommand bibitem
50475 The \SpecialChar TeX
50477 \begin_inset Newline newline
50481 \begin_inset Flex URL
50484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50486 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
50494 \begin_layout Bibliography
50495 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50496 LatexCommand bibitem
50502 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50504 \begin_inset Newline newline
50508 \begin_inset Flex URL
50511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50513 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
50521 \begin_layout Bibliography
50522 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50523 LatexCommand bibitem
50530 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50532 name "Documentation"
50533 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
50540 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50544 \begin_inset Newline newline
50548 \begin_inset Flex URL
50551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50553 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
50561 \begin_layout Bibliography
50562 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50563 LatexCommand bibitem
50570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50572 name "Documentation"
50573 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
50578 how to use the program
50580 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50584 \begin_inset Newline newline
50588 \begin_inset Flex URL
50591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50593 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
50601 \begin_layout Bibliography
50602 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50603 LatexCommand bibitem
50610 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50612 name "Documentation"
50613 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
50618 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50624 \begin_inset Index idx
50627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50629 packages ! biblatex
50635 \begin_inset Newline newline
50639 \begin_inset Flex URL
50642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50644 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
50652 \begin_layout Bibliography
50653 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50654 LatexCommand bibitem
50661 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50663 name "Documentation"
50664 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
50669 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50675 \begin_inset Index idx
50678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50686 \begin_inset Newline newline
50690 \begin_inset Flex URL
50693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50695 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
50703 \begin_layout Bibliography
50704 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50705 LatexCommand bibitem
50712 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50714 name "Documentation"
50715 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
50725 \begin_inset Newline newline
50729 \begin_inset Flex URL
50732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50734 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
50742 \begin_layout Bibliography
50743 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50744 LatexCommand bibitem
50745 key "makeindex-man"
50751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50754 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
50764 \begin_inset Newline newline
50768 \begin_inset Flex URL
50771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50773 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
50781 \begin_layout Bibliography
50782 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50783 LatexCommand bibitem
50790 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50792 name "Documentation"
50793 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
50803 \begin_inset Newline newline
50807 \begin_inset Flex URL
50810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50812 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
50820 \begin_layout Bibliography
50821 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50822 LatexCommand bibitem
50829 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50831 name "Documentation"
50832 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
50837 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
50839 \begin_inset Newline newline
50843 \begin_inset Flex URL
50846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50848 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
50856 \begin_layout Bibliography
50857 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50858 LatexCommand bibitem
50865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50867 name "Documentation"
50868 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
50873 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50879 \begin_inset Index idx
50882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50890 \begin_inset Newline newline
50894 \begin_inset Flex URL
50897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50899 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
50907 \begin_layout Bibliography
50908 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50909 LatexCommand bibitem
50916 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50918 name "Documentation"
50919 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
50924 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50930 \begin_inset Index idx
50933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50935 packages ! enumitem
50941 \begin_inset Newline newline
50945 \begin_inset Flex URL
50948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50950 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
50958 \begin_layout Bibliography
50959 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50960 LatexCommand bibitem
50967 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50969 name "Documentation"
50970 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
50975 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50981 \begin_inset Index idx
50984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50986 packages ! fancyhdr
50992 \begin_inset Newline newline
50996 \begin_inset Flex URL
50999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51001 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51009 \begin_layout Bibliography
51010 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51011 LatexCommand bibitem
51018 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51020 name "Documentation"
51021 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51026 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51032 \begin_inset Index idx
51035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51037 packages ! hyperref
51043 \begin_inset Newline newline
51047 \begin_inset Flex URL
51050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51052 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51060 \begin_layout Bibliography
51061 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51062 LatexCommand bibitem
51069 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51071 name "Documentation"
51072 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51077 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51083 \begin_inset Index idx
51086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51088 packages ! microtpye
51094 \begin_inset Newline newline
51098 \begin_inset Flex URL
51101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51103 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51111 \begin_layout Bibliography
51112 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51113 LatexCommand bibitem
51120 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51122 name "Documentation"
51123 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51128 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51134 \begin_inset Index idx
51137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51145 \begin_inset Newline newline
51149 \begin_inset Flex URL
51152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51154 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51162 \begin_layout Bibliography
51163 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51164 LatexCommand bibitem
51171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51173 name "Documentation"
51174 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51179 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51185 \begin_inset Index idx
51188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51190 packages ! prettyref
51196 \begin_inset Newline newline
51200 \begin_inset Flex URL
51203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51205 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51213 \begin_layout Bibliography
51214 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51215 LatexCommand bibitem
51222 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51224 name "Documentation"
51225 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51230 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51236 \begin_inset Index idx
51239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51241 packages ! refstyle
51247 \begin_inset Newline newline
51251 \begin_inset Flex URL
51254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51256 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51264 \begin_layout Bibliography
51265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51266 LatexCommand bibitem
51273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51276 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51281 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51283 \begin_inset Newline newline
51287 \begin_inset Flex URL
51290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51292 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51300 \begin_layout Bibliography
51301 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51302 LatexCommand bibitem
51309 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51312 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51317 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51319 \begin_inset Newline newline
51323 \begin_inset Flex URL
51326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51328 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51336 \begin_layout Bibliography
51337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51338 LatexCommand bibitem
51345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51348 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51353 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51354 for Cyrillic languages:
51355 \begin_inset Newline newline
51359 \begin_inset Flex URL
51362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51364 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51372 \begin_layout Bibliography
51373 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51374 LatexCommand bibitem
51381 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51384 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
51389 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51391 \begin_inset Newline newline
51395 \begin_inset Flex URL
51398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51400 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
51408 \begin_layout Bibliography
51409 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51410 LatexCommand bibitem
51417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51420 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
51425 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51427 \begin_inset Newline newline
51431 \begin_inset Flex URL
51434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51436 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
51444 \begin_layout Bibliography
51445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51446 LatexCommand bibitem
51453 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51456 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
51461 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51463 \begin_inset Newline newline
51467 \begin_inset Flex URL
51470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51472 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
51480 \begin_layout Standard
51481 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51515 \begin_inset Note Note
51518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51525 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
51526 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
51527 bibliography is the second one:
51535 \begin_layout Standard
51536 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
51537 LatexCommand bibtex
51538 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
51539 options "biblio/alphadin"
51546 \begin_layout Standard
51547 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51551 \begin_layout Standard
51555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51561 pagedeclaration}[1]{
51564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51570 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
51578 \begin_inset Note Note
51581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51582 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
51583 \begin_inset space ~
51587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51589 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
51601 \begin_layout Standard
51602 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
51603 LatexCommand printnomenclature
51609 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
51610 LatexCommand printindex